Analog Four Notebook 1v50a

II Contents he Analog Four Notebook
Contents
Overview 1
Architecture 11
Synthesizer Sounds 23
Track Modulation 53
Sound Performance 67
Pattern Basics 91
Patterns Advanced 117
Chains & Songs 149
Effects 167
MIDI & USB 185
CV Functions 221
Global & System 249
Analog Keys 267
Quick Reference 287
The Analog Four Notebook Contents III

IV Contents he Analog Four Notebook
1
Overview
Elektron released the original Analog Four in on getting the best from both the original MkI and
2012 and followed up in 2017 with the MkII MkII Analog Four plus alignment to the Analog
Version. The company based in Gothenburg, Keys model. Illustrations mainly show MkII but
Sweden have over 20 years of experience in principles apply to both. There are walkthroughs
creating unique musical instruments. Some and instructions that will help both the newcomer
may say that Elektron instruments and Analog and advanced users alike. The contents section
Four have a steep learning curve, but the has hyperlinks to jump to each page. A return to
power and versatility offers a great return on the contents hyperlink is located in the footer.
investment. So what is Analog Four? The Hyperlinks require a compatible ebook viewer.
official description is that it’s a 4-voice Use this as a quick reference or a training aid to
analogue synthesizer. To expand, the Analog 4 get started with Analog Four. The book has
is an analogue synthesizer which contains 4 designed-in space allocated for making your own
voices each with 2 oscillators, 2 sub oscillators notes, comments and personalisation when
and a noise generator. In addition each has a using it in PDF editors such as Goodnotes and
ladder filter and a multimode filter. The Analog Adobe. The design is intended to bring
Four contains 4 synth tracks, an FX track and a comprehensive content alongside your own
CV track. The unit supports CV as well as MIDI notes in an e-notebook format that supplements
IN / Out and USB MIDI. The sequencing rather than replaces the official manual.
features are synonymous with Elektron and
these are fully available within the Analog Four.
This guide offers you a reference and also tips
The Analog Four Notebook Contents 1

1 Overview
How to Use This Notebook NOTES
This book combines a formal reference with your own notes and comments,
Your Notes
collectively bringing together a comprehensive guide to the Analog Four. Can be writ
ten here He
re
Sections are laid out to cover the full workflow with walkthroughs, step by
step guides and tips. Some pages carry a wide margin and some are
intentionally blank enabling you to make your own notes on the specific
topics covered.
The book is written with these conventions:-
(CONTROL)
Rounded parentheses represent the rotary controls for example:-
(DATA ENTRY) controls labelled (A) - (J).
(TRACK LEVEL) for the Level/Data control.
[FUNC]
Square parentheses contain functions that are selectable by a specifically

defined button combo, for example:-
[FUNC] + [REC] - Functions which require multiple button selections

simultaneously are shown with a + symbol between each button.
Trig Keys / Buttons 1-16 will be indicated purely by the respective trig
step number i.e. [1], [2] … [16].
Some keys are represented by a symbol on the device, for example the
global settings. When referring to these buttons the same square
parentheses convention applies i.e. [PLAY], [STOP], [SETTINGS] etc.
[SONG] Song Mode [CHAIN] Chain Mode
[TEMPO] Tempo and Metronome Setting

[SETTINGS] Global Settings
Did you know?

unded in
Elektron were fo burg,
MK I MK II 1998 in Go th en
ill
Sweden which stQ
The book covers both Analog Four MkI and also Analog Four MkII. Where remains the H
features are unique to one model the specific logo will be indicated.
2 Contents he Analog Four Notebook

Overview 1
MK I 2 x ¼ Mono 2 x ¼ Stereo /
synthesizer Mono main audio
CV outputs outputs
63 mm
On / Off 12V DC Power Hi Speed 5 Pin MIDI DIN 2 x ¼ Mono / 1 x ¼ Stereo

Switch Input. USB 2.0 In, Out - Sync A, Stereo audio headphone
Type B Thru - Sync B (Sync Din inputs output
Use PSU 3 24 or 48)
176
mm
MK II
225mm
2 x ¼ Mono 4 x ¼ Mono 2 x ¼ Stereo /

Expression Synthesizer Mono main audio
or CV In CV outputs outputs
82 mm
On / Off 12V DC Power Hi Speed 5 Pin MIDI DIN 2 x ¼ Mono/ 1 x ¼ Stereo

Switch Input. USB 2.0 In, Out - Sync A, Thru - Stereo audio headphone
Type B Sync B (Sync, Din 24 or inputs output
Use PSU 3b 48)

1 Overview
MK I
Master Volume Bank Select

Adjusts the Audio Output and Selects the respective Bank A-D or E-H. [FUNC]+[BANK]
Headphone levels for Pattern Change mode
Level / Data
Adjusts the selected track level. [FUNC]
+ (LEVEL) Scrolls the sound browser
menu
Song Mode
Selects or Deselects SONG mode and
Selects Bank A or E. [FUNC] Selects Bank C or G. [FUNC]
[FUNC] + [SONG] Selects Song edit
+ [A/E] for Trig Mute Menu + [C/G] for Note Slide Menu
mode. LED lit in Song Mode.
Chain Mode Selects Bank B or F. Selects Bank D or H. [FUNC]

Selects or Deselects CHAIN mode and [FUNC] + [B/F] to add + [D/H] for Parameter Slide
[FUNC] + [CHAIN] adds a new Chain accents Menu
scratch pad row. LED lit in Chain Mode.
Navigation
Navigates through menu options [UP]
[DOWN] [LEFT] [RIGHT]
Sequencer Transport Modes & Controls

[RECORD] Grid Recording Mode - On/Off - LED
shows On for Grid Recording
[RECORD] + [PLAY] Live Recording Mode - LED

Flashes to show Live recording
[PLAY] Starts the sequencer running.

[STOP] Stops the sequencer playback.
[FUNC] + [RECORD] for copy function

[FUNC] + [STOP] Pastes the copied item
[FUNC] + [PLAY] for clear function
Yes/Save
Used to select menu options and also
selects save options along with selected
element ie Kits, Patterns. [YES]
No/Reload
Used to cancel menu options and also
selects reload options along with
selected element ie Kits, Patterns. [NO]
Trig Keys 1-16
Secondary Function Selects Patterns and also adds trigs at steps through the
Accesses the secondary ‘red’ function by pattern
holding [FUNC] plus the chosen button
Tempo
Opens the tempo menu. Use [FUNC] +
[TEMPO] for setting Tap Tempo. LED
Flashes in time with tempo

Overview 1
MK I
Data Entry Controls Track 1 … 4

10 Endless Rotaries (A)-(J) Adjust the [TRACK] Selection of 1 - 4 Tracks. To mute
parameter aligned with context specific or unmute a track use [FUNC]+[TRACK]
function on the display. Press and Turn for
greater incremental changes FX
[FX] Selection of Effect Track. To mute or
unmute the track use [FUNC]+[FX]
Perf CV
Selects Performance [PERF] Mode. [CV] Selection of CV Track. To mute or
[FUNC]+[PERF] to adjust performance settings unmute a track use [FUNC]+[CV]
Arp Osc 1 Parameter Page
Selects [ARP] Arpeggiator. [FUNC]+[ARP] to [OSC1] Opens Synth Tracks 1-4 Oscillator 1
adjust arpeggiator settings Page. On the FX Track selects External Audio
inputs. CV track selects options for CV A Output.
Note
Selects current track [NOTE] Note settings. Osc 2 Parameter Page
[FUNC]+[NOTE] to adjust note settings [OSC2] Opens Synth Tracks 1-4 Oscillator 2
Page. CV track selects options for CV B Output.
Filters Parameter Page

[FILTERS] Opens Synth Tracks 1-4 Filter Page.
FX Track - Chorus Settings. CV track selects
options for CV C Output.
Amp Parameter Page
[AMP] Opens Synth Tracks 1-4 Amp Page. FX
Track - Delay Settings. CV track selects options
for CV D Output.
Env Parameter Page
[ENV] Opens Synth and CV Tracks Envelope
Pages. FX Track - Reverb Settings.
LFO Parameter Page

[LFO] Opens Synth, FX and CV Tracks LFO
Pages.
Transpose
[TRANSPOSE] enables transposition of track
and notes (see note setup) and can be locked
with [FUNC] + [TRANSPOSE].
Keyboard
[KEYBOARD] C1 - C2 enables play-out of melody notes
and also sub menu options are available with [FUNC] +
[C1] Kit Menu: Save, Load, Reload, Clear, Performance,
Poly Mode settings
[D1] Sound Menu. Sound Browser, manager, settings
[E1] Track Menu. Notes, Arp Setup, reload, save.

Page
Selects the active pattern page. Lit LED [F1] Pattern Mode. Reload, Save patterns
indicates pattern pages, flashing LED
indicates current track being played. [G1] Song Menu for saving / loading and managing songs
[FUNC]+[PAGE] Scale Menu.
[A1] Click Settings, opens metronome settings.
[B1] Swing Setting menu.
[C2] Global Settings: Project, Synth, System Midi Settings

1 Overview
MK II
Main Volume Bank Select

Adjusts the Audio Output and Selects the respective Bank [A]...[H]. [FUNC]+BANK [A]...
Headphone levels [D] for Pattern Change mode indicated by illuminated LED
Track Level
Adjusts the selected track level. [FUNC] [FUNC] +
+ (LEVEL) Scrolls through the sound [E] Trig Mute Menu
browser menu [F] Adding accents
[G] Note Slide Menu
Song Mode [H] Parameter Slide Menu
Selects / Deselects SONG mode. [FUNC]
+ [SONG] Selects song edit mode. Lit
when in Song Mode.
Quick Perf Amount
Chain Mode Adjusts the performance value
Selects / Deselects CHAIN mode. for the macro selected using
[FUNC] + [CHAIN] adds a new blank [QPER]. [FUNC]+[QPER] to
chain scratch pad row. mute macro’s
Global Settings
Opens [GLOBAL] setting menu. [FUNC] +
[GLOBAL] Opens Project save menu.
Press & Hold to load project
Sequencer Transport Modes & Controls

[PLAY] Starts the sequencer running.
[STOP] Stops the sequencer playback.
[RECORD] Grid Recording Mode - On/Off. Illuminated
when in Grid Recording mode
[RECORD] + [PLAY] Live Recording Mode. Flashes to

show Live recording
[FUNC] + [RECORD] to copy

[FUNC] + [STOP] Pastes the copied item
[FUNC] + [PLAY] for clear
Yes/Save
Used to select menu options and also
selects save functions along with selected
element ie Kits, Patterns. [YES]
No/Reload
Used to cancel menu options and also
selects reload function along with selected
element ie Kits, Patterns. [NO]
Secondary Function
Accesses the secondary ‘green’ function
by holding [FUNC] plus the chosen button
Tempo
Opens the tempo menu [TEMPO] or use
[FUNC]+[TEMPO] to tap tempo BPM
Kit Menu Track Menu

Opens [KIT] menu. [FUNC]+[KIT] Saves Opens [TRK] menu. [FUNC]+[TRK] click
current kit. track settings
Sound Menu Pattern Menu
Opens [SND] menu. [FUNC]+[SND] Opens Opens [PTN] menu. [FUNC]+[PTN] swing
sound Setup menu setup menu
Performance Mixer Song Menu
Opens mixer [MIX] menu. [FUNC]+[MIX] Opens song [SONG] menu.
Poly setup [FUNC]+[SONG] saves active song

Overview 1
MK II
Data Entry Controls Synth Tracks T1, T2, T3, T4

10 Endless Rotaries (A)-(J) Adjust the parameter aligned Selection of synth tracks [TRK 1] - [TRK 4].
with context specific function shown on the display. Press Mute / Unmute a track use [FUNC]+[TRK]
and Turn for greater incremental changes
FX
Performance Mode [FX] Selection of Effect Track.
Assigns the10 Data Entry Rotaries up to 5 track Mute / Unmute the track use [FUNC]+[FX]
parameters each. Set by [PERF], use CV
[FUNC]+[PERF] to set up the assignments [CV] Selection of CV Track.
Trig Keys 1-16 Mute / Unmute a track use [FUNC]+[CV]
Selects Patterns and also adds trigs at steps through the Arp
pattern Selects [ARP] Arpeggiator. [FUNC]+[ARP] to
adjust arpeggiator settings
--- Note
Selects current track [NOTE] Note settings.
[FUNC]+[NOTE] to adjust note settings
Osc 1 Parameter Page

[OSC1] Opens Synth Tracks 1-4 Oscillator 1
Page. On the FX Track selects External Audio
inputs. CV track selects options for CV A Output.
Osc 2 Parameter Page
[OSC2] Opens Synth Tracks 1-4 Oscillator 2
Page. CV track selects options for CV B Output.
Filters Parameter Page

[FILTERS] Opens Synth Tracks 1-4 Filter Page.
FX Track - Chorus Settings.
CV track selects options for CV C Output.
Amp Parameter Page
[AMP] Opens Synth Tracks 1-4 Amp Page.
FX Track - Delay Settings.
CV track selects options for CV D Output.
Envelope Parameter Page
[ENV] Opens Synth Tracks & CV Env Pages.
FX Track - Reverb Settings.
LFO Parameter Page

[LFO] Opens Synth,FX & CV Tracks LFO Pages.
Keyboard
Keyboard [C1] - [C2] enables play-out of melody notes
Page Keyboard Transpose

Selects the active pattern page. Lit LED [OCT] enables transposition of Keyboard LEDs indicate
indicates pattern pages, flashing LED indicates the octave transposed
current track being played. [FUNC]+[PAGE]
Scale Menu.
Navigation Transpose
Navigates through menu options [TRNS] enables transposition of track and notes
[UP] [DOWN] [LEFT] [RIGHT] and can be locked with [FUNC] + [TRNS].

1 Overview
1.1 Common Functions NOTES
Some of the functions available in the Analog Four are common across
various elements. Copy, Clear, Paste operates within various functions, for
example the commands can be used on patterns, trigs, kits etc. Undo and
Redo options are also available when in the appropriate context.
▌ CLEARING - Example Copying a Pattern
1. Press [FUNC] + [PLAY] to clear within the selected context i.e. pattern.
2. Press [FUNC] + [PLAY] a second time to undo the previous command.
▌ COPYING - Example Copying a Pattern
1. Press [FUNC] + [REC] to copy within the selected context i.e. pattern.
2. Press [FUNC] + [REC] a second time to undo the previous command.
▌ PASTING - Example Copying a Pattern
1. Press [FUNC] + [STOP] to paste within the selected context i.e. pattern.
2. Press [FUNC] + [STOP] a second time to undo the previous command.

Overview 1
NOTES 1.2 Analog Four Mark I (MkI) vs Mark II (MkII)
Some new features were added to the MkII version of the Analog Four.
Here are a few of the key features that were added or changed in the MkII
- Revised circuitry for improved bass
- Revised design and user control workflow changes
- Pattern modes include temp direct jump
- Quick Performance mode and controls
- Individual track audio outputs
- From 2 (MkI) to 4 Physical CV/Gate Outputs
- New larger OLED display
- Fill functionality with dedicated key control
- Illuminated coloured keys
Analog Keys has the addition of:-
- 37 Note Keyboard
- Joystick and dedicated keyboard controls
- Sound browser control

NOTES

2
Architecture
Analog Four is essentially a 4 voice synthesizer Sounds. Understanding the architecture and
coupled with complex pattern features structure of Analog Four is important in adopting
synonymous with Elektron devices. The sound a good workflow. This section describes the
structure is purely analogue with digital control. structure and architecture of its projects, audio
Most Elektron instruments show their strength configuration and CV set up. Understanding the
in the quality of the sound modules coupled key functions and terminology is also an
with advanced sequencing functionality. Analog important factor when working with Analog Four
Four has many in depth features that support (and in fact most of Elektron’s Devices). This
this headline feature set. Under the hood is a section gives out the definitions of these terms
powerful memory structure enabling access and functions that are important. General and
and management of many sounds and kits. common features such as naming and
Analog Four’s +Drive, a non-volatile storage navigation are also covered in this section.
device, holds up to 128 projects, up to 4096 Understanding these guidelines, definitions and
sounds which can also be assembled into kits. the overall structure sets the platform for getting
Patterns are the fundamental building block of to know the foundations of Analog Four and
the Analog Four where sounds are assembled getting the best from the device. It helps in
into melodies and patterns. Four synth tracks developing your own more advanced workflows
along with an FX track and CV track are and using the feature set to the full.
contained in the unit. Storage is managed in
banks where each bank contains up to 16
patterns with each pattern containing up to 8

2 Architecture
2.1 Glossary of Terms
While you may think this should be hidden at the back of this book, understanding the terminology
applied in ‘Elektron World’ is a big step in understanding the Analog Four and its performance. It
makes sense to become familiar with the essential terms to help embed full functionality into your
workflow
+Drive: Analog Four’s main integrated Parameter: A Specific function and control
memory storage device containing up to 4096 element that can be adjusted to affect a sound
sounds available to all projects. or operation
Analog Four: Another box full of analogue Parameter Lock: Is where a unique parameter
synth goodness coupled with precise digital setting is applied to one or more Trigs for ex-
control. Don't use under water. ample a pitch setting for note trigs in order to
develop a melody sequence.
Chain: A sequence of multiple patterns linked
in a playback order and used to combine into Pattern: This is the backbone and core of
songs Analog Four sequencing. Each pattern stores
the sequence of sounds and trigs, parameter
Conditional Locks: Applies specific rules on locks, BPM and everything associated with
how and if a Trig will operate. This is con- each pattern
sidered pre-requisite criteria for the step to
operate. Project: The overall pattern container which
includes general settings and all banks and
CV Track: Controls external gear through pattern slots.
analog CV and gate signals on the dedicated
CV Outputs. Song: A structured and typically a longer
arrangement of chained patterns
Elektron: The designer and manufacturer of
Analog Four and also many other great audio Sound: A Sound is created under a synth
products. track using the oscillator, filters and all the au-
dio track settings specific to that storable
FX Track: Dedicated track for controlling effect sound.
settings and sequences.
Sound Lock: Sets an individual sound from
Kit: A Kit is a set of 4 Audio synth tracks to- the sound pool for each step on the same
gether with the FX and CV tracks and associ- track, allowing different sounds to be used on
ated settings. All assembled together. 128 different steps of the sequence
Kits per project.
Sound Pool: A memory location set aside for
Lock Trig / Trigless Lock: Activates a defined each independent project containing sounds
parameter change on a sequence step without and the features (i.e. sound locks) to form the
triggering the audio note i.e. Filter change. sound.
Note Trig: Triggers a specific note sound or Synth Track: Analog Four contains 4 Synth
midi note on the selected track step. For ex- tracks for triggering and creating audio
ample when setting sequence patterns sounds.
Overbridge: Specific Elektron software utility Trig: A term used to describe the trigger / ac-
which enables the communication between tivation of notes or parameter changes for a
Elektron hardware i.e. A4 and its digital VST selected step or note in a sequence
‘twin’ operating on a PC/Mac based DAW.

Architecture 2
NOTES 2.2 Project Structure
1 2 3 128
Project Project Projects
8 Banks each with 16 pattern slots Max 128 projects stored on +Drive
A B C D 1 2 3 4
Bank
System level, 4 Slots per project
E F G H Global
16 patterns per bank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

16 Songs per project, used to
structure pattern and chain
arrangements
Contains Trigs, Parameter
System Level - Up to 4096 Sounds
6
Locks, BPM, Length, Swing,
1 Songs 16 Pattern Time Sig and FX/CV Settings
(Max 128 per project)
+DRIVE
A Kit is a collection of 4 Synth

Tracks and Settings and 1 FX
and 1 CV Track Kit
(Max 128 per project)
6 5 T1 T4
Sound Settings
CV FX Synth for the 4 Synth Synth
Project Level - 128 Sounds per Project
Tracks
Sound Pool
Sounds are the synth settings

for each synth track. These
Sound are stored in the sound pool
and / or +Drive
4096 Sounds, 256 per Bank

+Drive (A-P) stored internally on the
+Drive
Sound Manager
Transfers between +Drive 1 128
& Sound Pool
Project Project 128 Projects stored on the
+Drive
Sound Sound 128 Sounds available in

Pool Pool Analog Four memory for each
individual project
Only sounds in the project sound pool can be sound locked

2 Architecture
2.3 Audio Structure
Osc 2 F/B
From Previous Voice To Next Voice
(next track)
Oscillator Oscillator 2 x Assignable 2 x Assignable 2 x Assignable 2 x Assignable

1 AM & Sync
2 Destinations Destinations Destinations Destinations
Sub Osc AM OSC2 P2 AM Sub Osc
OSC1 P1 OSC2 P1
Noise ADSR ADSR Modulation Modulation
OSC1 P2
Filter Envelope Envelope

Ladder ENVF ENV2 LFO1 LFO2
ENV P1 ENV P2 LFO P1 LFO P2
Filter
FLTR
Osc 1 F/B
ADSR
Multimode
Overdrive Filter AMP Pan
FLTR FLTR Amp Envelope
ENVA
AMP
Ext In Sends
Chorus
AMP
Ext In
Delay
Delay
AMP
Synth Track
Ext In
Reverb
AMP
Effects Sends 2 x Assignable 2 x Assignable

Destinations Destinations
Chorus Delay Reverb

Chorus Delay Reverb
Modulation Modulation
FX Track
LFO1 LFO2
L R
Effects Return LFO P1 LFO P2
TRACK 1-4
PERFORMANCE MIXER FX T1 T2 T3 T4
Mix
Ext In
Pan
FX Sends
L R T1 T2 T3 T4
FX Track
Pan
FX Sends OUTPUT OUTPUT
L R Analog Elements in Green
Other Grey / Black Elements are Digital

EXT INPUT Settings Page is Shown in Orange

Architecture 2
NOTES 2.4 CV Structure
CV is typically found in classic synths for controlling external gear. CV -
Control Voltage is an analogue method using gate signals and voltage to
control other CV compliant equipment. MkI has 2 physical CV outputs
while MkII has 4 physical outputs and 2 inputs for expression or CV.
CV CV CV CV
1 2 3 4
CV CV CV CV
Out Out Out Out
CV / Gate
OUTPUT
CV A CV B CV C CV D
2 x Assignable 2 x Assignable 2 x Assignable 2 x Assignable

Destinations Destinations Destinations Destinations
ADSR ADSR Modulation Modulation
Filter Envelope Envelope
CV Track
ENVF ENV2 LFO1 LFO2
ENV P1 ENV P2 LFO P1 LFO P2
CV
Control Voltage typically controlling the pitch of a synth using the common
method of voltage per octave. This is typically used by manufacturers
including Moog, Roland, Doepfer. Voltages of 0-5v, -5 +5v, 0-10v are
commonly used. The less common method is Frequency per Volt (Korg,
Yamaha) where voltage is doubled per octave. Matching up hardware and
setup compatibility is important when connecting CV devices.
Gate
Triggers when the note should start to be played. V Trigger starts a note
when voltage goes high while S-Trigger types are low to trigger the note.

2 Architecture
2.5 Menu & Parameter Navigation
The Analog Four display is context sensitive meaning the pages change to match whatever function
is selected linked to the associated parameter set. There are however some style and layout
conventions that apply across the MkI and MkII devices.
DATA ENTRY
Adjust the relative data entry rotary control to change the

associated parameter eg Turn (F)
Press and Hold the data entry control while turning to

adjust in larger increments eg Press + Turn (F)
Press the data entry control and the NO button to reset the
value eg Press (F) + [NO]
To reset ALL parameters on specific function page press

the Parameter Button and press Play eg [SRC] + [PLAY] 10 Data entry rotaries are relative to the
context of the display parameter positions A-J
also for TRIG, FLTR, AMP & LFO
Hold any Parameter key (TRIG, SRC, FLTR, AMP, LFO) to

see the associated current parameter settings
Current Tempo Setting in Beats
per Minute
MK II
Current Kit Name and
Number. Also temporarily
shows a parameter name Transport control status
when using Data Entry to edit
Currently Selected BANK A-H

and Pattern Number 1-16
Current Active Pattern and

Current Track Selected active song row. _ _ Indicates
scratch pad
Track Volume Level
Current Tempo Setting in Beats

per Minute
MK I Transport control status
Track Volume Level Parameter Page Name and Page

selected (Dash Above Name)
Current Kit Name and
Number. Also temporarily
shows a parameter name
when using Data Entry to edit
Current Play position in Bars,
Beats and Steps
Current Active Pattern and
active song row. _ _ Indicates
scratch pad.
MK I MK II
Menu Navigation
Use the Up, Down, Left and Right Arrows to navigate in some menu structures. The Yes / No buttons
confirm or cancel. (LEVEL) on MkI and (TRACK LEVEL) MkII are also used for navigating and scrolling up
/ down through options. Track Level will be referred to as TRACK LEVEL for both MkI and MkII in this
book.
FUNC
Pressing FUNC while adjusting some parameters enables ‘jump’ selection between values rather than a
seamless step through sequential values. Using [FUNC] + [UP][DOWN] scrolls most menus by a full page.
[FUNC] + Option selects the secondary function. This operates like a shift option and secondary functions
are labelled in red on the MKI and green on the MKII

Architecture 2
2.6 Naming Menu
Some functions have the option to name or rename, for example when saving a pattern. These
menus are selected or appear when the naming or renaming of a pattern, sound etc is
required.Maximum number of characters in the name is 16.
[LEFT] & [RIGHT]

navigate between the current characters
[UP] & [DOWN] or turn (LEVEL) MKI,

(TRACK LEVEL) MKII to select a character
[FUNC] + [NO] Erase Character
[FUNC] + [YES] Insert Space
POP UP NAMING MENU
Hold [FUNC] for Pop Up mode.
While holding, navigate to highlight

character required.
Release [FUNC] to Insert character
The functions, Copy, Paste and Clear options using the secondary key options [FUNC] + [REC] for
Copy, [FUNC] + [PLAY] for Clear and [FUNC] + [STOP] for Paste are also available within the
naming menu. Undo functionality also operates within the naming function.

2 Architecture
2.7 Project Management NOTES
A project is the highest order element in the data structure hierarchy and
contains 128 patterns within 8 Banks. There are 128 kits, 16 Songs and 4
global slots. Global settings [GLOBAL] mode is selected as follows:-
MK I MkI Press [FUNC] + Keyboard [C2].
MK II MkII Press dedicated [GLOBAL] key.
Holding [GLOBAL] or [FUNC] + Keyboard [C2] will jump straight to project

load menu and project selection list.
▌ LOADING A PROJECT
1. Select the GLOBAL SETTINGS option [GLOBAL] on MkII or keyboard

[C2] on MkI.
2. Select PROJECT using (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN]. Press [YES].
3. Highlight the LOAD PROJECT option using the (TRACK LEVEL) or

[UP] [DOWN] Keys, and then press [YES].
4. The project list opens and scroll to highlight the selected project to load
and press [YES]. Press [NO] to cancel. Project 001 contains Elektron
presets.
5. Option to save currently active project may appear. Press [YES] to

select save. Projects may be lost if not saved.
▌ CREATING A NEW PROJECT
1. Select the GLOBAL SETTINGS option [GLOBAL] on MkII or keyboard

[C2] on MkI.
2. Select PROJECT and press [YES]. Menus remember last position so

may need [NO] to back up to next menu.
3. Highlight the LOAD PROJECT option using the (TRACK LEVEL) or

[UP] [DOWN] Keys, then press [YES] or [NO] to cancel.
4. The project list opens and scroll to highlight the CREATE NEW option in
the list and press [YES] to load.
5. A prompt may appear to save current project.

Architecture 2
NOTES
▌ QUICK SAVING OF A PROJECT
1. Press [FUNC] + [GLOBAL] to save project in MkII. MK II
2. Assign a name if this is the first time save.
3. Select [YES] to save patterns and project or [NO] to cancel.
▌ SAVING A PROJECT AS
1. Press [GLOBAL] to select GLOBAL SETTINGS MkII or press [FUNC] +

[C2] on MkI.
2. Select PROJECT and press [YES].
3. Highlight SAVE PROJECT option and press [YES] to save.
4. Project list opens and select an empty slot where the project will be
saved.
5. A new open slot will open the project naming function. Set the new
name and press [YES] to save.
MK II Use quick save [FUNC]+[GLOBAL] to access the save menu.
Internal permanent storage is

held on the 1GB +Drive
+Drive
LOAD PROJECT SAVE PROJECT
from +Drive into the to +Drive from the
Project Memory Project Memory
1
Project
Project Memory
Editing and project changes are undertaken in project

memory and will be retained in the active memory when
powered off. However to permanently store projects they
would need to be saved to +Drive

2 Architecture
NOTES
▌ MANAGING PROJECTS
1. Select the GLOBAL SETTINGS option [GLOBAL] MkII or [FUNC] + [C2]

in MkI.
2. Select PROJECT and press [YES].
3. Highlight PROJECT MANAGER using the (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP]

[DOWN] keys and press [YES].
4. The project list opens and select one or more projects to manage by
scrolling and using [YES] to check /uncheck. Projects selected are
checked.
5. Press [RIGHT] to open the project manager menu for editing options.
6. Select the option required:
CLEAR: Clears the selected project and resets.
DELETE: Removes and deletes projects from selected slots.
RENAME: Opens renaming screen. Only when a single project is

selected.
LOAD FROM: Loads selected project and overwrites active project.
SAVE TO: Saves active project to the selected slot.
TOGGLE: Switches write protection on or off.
INIT NEW: Initialises an empty slot. (Only when an empty slot is

selected).
7. Press [YES] to confirm or [NO] to cancel.

Architecture 2
NOTES
▌ NOTES ON MANAGING PROJECTS
• Project need to be saved on +Drive to be retained permanently.
• Project memory will retain the currently active project but must be saved
to +Drive to be stored permanently.
• Currently active project in the project manager is shown with an arrow

symbol.
• Projects can be locked and protected from deleting etc and are in-
dicated with a lock symbol.
• Multiple projects can be selected in the project manager, however some

options i.e. INIT NEW are only available for singular project selections.
• Copy, Clear, Paste options using the FUNC + REC, PLAY, STOP keys
are available from within the project manager load and save menus.
• An individual project contains patterns (128), kits (128), Songs (16)

global slots (4) and a sound pool containing sounds (128).
• Up to 128 projects are saved in the +Drive.
• Project 001 is the default factory preset library from Elektron.
• LOAD FROM option will overwrite the existing current project. Save this
active project prior to using this function.

NOTES

3
Synthesizer Sounds
The core of Analog Four is its synthesizer Pool and the tools enable assignment and
engines managed across 4 synth tracks management of sounds. The Analog four MkI
handling each of the 4 voices. While voices are and MkII operate on similar sound principles
by default handled 1 per track, the voicing can with respect to the synths although some key
be configured to provide polyphony. Sounds combinations and operating workflows may be
are created within the unit and these can be slightly different. Generally assume that the MkI
stored and managed within the structure of the and Analog Keys form similar key structures.
Analog Four. Tools such as the sound browser
and sound manager support working with the
sounds and their libraries. Many of the general
sound settings are found within the system
sound menu, accessed by pressing [SND] on
MkII and [FUNC] + Keyboard [D1] on MkI.
Think of this menu as the general sound toolkit
as opposed to the specifics of each track which
are contained in the discrete parameter pages.
The Synthesizer engines operate on the
principles as subtractive synthesis using
oscillators to create a core raw tone from which
filters and envelopes carve out the final sound.
Sounds are stored within the +Drive or Sound

3 Synthesizer Sounds
3.1 Workflow Overview
Sounds can be used from a library supplied as part of the original Analog Four, 3rd party presets or
can be created from scratch. Guidance for these options are covered in detail but a general
overview of the steps to understand a typical workflow process are covered first.
STORED PRESETS S CREATE FROM SCRATCH
Select Track
Clear existing track sound Create a new clear project

Sound > Clear Track Sound 1 Project > Load Project > Create New
Check / Clear Parameter Pages

2 Parameter Page + Play to clear
Copy sounds from +Drive to Track
Sound > Sound Manager > Load to Track Note: Some pages such as filter may still
contain a setting that’s not neutral. For
OR 3 example Res - Resonance is active after clear
Copy sounds from +Drive to Sound Pool
Sound > Sound Manager > Copy To
4 Save and name initial sound

[YES] + [SND] MkII or [YES] + Keyboard [D1] MkI
Select sound for track

Double Tap Track to open Sound Browser 5
6 Adjust or check general sound menu settings

[SND] MkII or [FUNC] + Keyboard [D1] MkI > Settings
Setup Oscillator 1
7 [OSC1] - Waveform - Tuning - Sub - Level - Noise (page 2)
Setup Oscillator 2
8 [OSC2] - Waveform - Tuning - Sub - Level
Setup Amplitude Modulation

9 [OSC2] Page 2 - AM - Sync - Vibrato
If required adjust synth parameters
Oscillators, Filter, Envelopes, Modulation, Amp
Setup Filter 1 - Ladder Filter & Overdrive
10 [FLTR] - Cut Off / Resonance - Overdrive - Envelopes
Setup Filter 2 - 2P Multimode

11 [FLTR] - Cut Off / Resonance - Type - Envelopes
Setup FX Settings FX Track Selected

12 [CHORUS] [DELAY] [REVERB]
Setup Output Amplitude

13 [AMP] - ADSR Output Envelope - FX Sends - Pan - Vol
Setup Modulation if Required

14 [LFO] [ENV]
Save the sound

15 [YES] + [SND] MkII or [YES] + Keyboard [D1] MkI
Sounds can be assembled into a Kit. A Kit consists of the 4 Synth Tracks, FX Track and The CV Track

NOTES 3.2 Sound Browser
Sounds reside both in the sound pool, useful as a working project storage
and the +Drive, considered as the system level permanent storage.
Sounds can be copied between. For immediate and quick previewing and
loading sounds, use the SOUND BROWSER as the ‘go-to’ tool.
+Drive
1
Project [LEFT] to Open Left Options Menu
Sound
Pool
Toggle between Sound Pool and +Drive
▌ OPENING SOUND BROWSER
1. Press [SND] on MkII or [FUNC] + [D1] on MkI to open SOUND MENU.
2. Scroll to SOUND BROWSER using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
3. Press [YES] to select or [NO] to cancel.
▌ QUICK OPENING SOUND BROWSER
1. Double Press Track [1] - [4] of selected track or Hold [FUNC] + [D1] on
MkI to Open SOUND BROWSER.
▌ SELECTING BETWEEN SOUND POOL AND +DRIVE VIEW
1. In the SOUND BROWSER Press [LEFT] to open the Left Option Menu.
2. The option to select the alternate memory will be available. So if already

viewing the SOUND ‘POOL’ the option to select +DRIVE will be
available and vice versa.
3. Scroll to highlight view POOL or +DRIVE to access the sounds in each.

NOTES
▌ SORTING SOUNDS IN THE SOUND BROWSER
1. In the SOUND BROWSER; Press [LEFT] to open the sort option menu.
2. The option to select the alternate sort will available. So if already

viewing the ABC Alphabetical order the option to sort by slot number
123 will be available and vice versa.
3. Scroll to highlight SORT 123 or SORT ABC to sort the sounds based on
the selection. Press [YES] to select or [NO] to cancel.
▌ FILTERING SOUNDS BASED ON ASSIGNED TAGS
1. In the SOUND BROWSER Press [LEFT] to open the Left Option Menu.
2. Scroll to highlight FILTER.
3. Press [YES] and the TAG browser will open.
4. Select the relevant tags to filter by pressing [YES] to toggle each

selection. Selections are shown checked.
5. Select <CLEAR> and press [YES] to clear filter. ‘X’ will appear on the
FILTER menu option when filtering is active.
▌ SEARCHING FOR SOUNDS
1. In the SOUND BROWSER Press [LEFT] to open the left option menu.
2. Scroll to highlight SEARCH and enter a text string to search. The entry
operates like the naming menu.
3. Press [YES] to activate search or [NO] to cancel.
▌ LOADING A SOUND
1. Select a track
2. In the SOUND BROWSER scroll to highlight the desired sound using

[UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL). Use [FUNC] + [UP] [DOWN] for
faster scrolling.
3. Press [YES] to LOAD to track or [NO] to cancel.

NOTES 3.3 Sound Manager
While the sound browser is good for quick and easy access to basic sound
file functions, for more complex options it is better to use the SOUND
MANAGER which provides more versatility and offers a wider function set.
[LEFT] to open sorting menu [RIGHT] to open sound operations menu
▌ OPENING SOUND MANAGER
1. Press [SND] on MkII or [FUNC] + [D1] on MkI to open SOUND MENU.
2. Scroll to SOUND MANAGER using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
▌ OPTIONS IN THE SOUND MANAGER SORTING MENU (LEFT)
In the sound manager press [LEFT] to open the sorting menu.
• VIEW POOL / VIEW +DRIVE Toggle between access and

view of the two locations.
• SORT ABC / SORT 123 Sort the library by slot number or

alphabetically.
• FILTER by selected tags.
• SEARCH the library base don text string entered.
Using the left sorting menu follows same process as within the SOUND
BROWSER Menu.
Use keyboard to preview sounds.

NOTES
▌ SOUND MANAGER OPERATIONS MENU OPTIONS
In the sound manager press [RIGHT] to open the operations menu
• LOAD TO TRACK Loads the selected sound to the active track,

forming a part of the track
• COPY TO .. Copies the selected sound to the desired location in

either the Sound Pool, +Drive or a selected Bank A - H. The default
destination will be the first free and available slot and available slots
in each location is shown in parenthesis - i.e. (254)
• STORE TRK SOUND Stores the active track sound to the selected
sound slot.
• RENAME Opens the naming tool and allows renaming of the

selected sound
• EDIT TAGS Opens the tagging option and enables assignment and
deletion using [YES] of search tags. Multiple can be selected but
only 2 are displayed.
• DELETE Deletes the selected sound
• SELECT ALL Selects all the sounds within the list
• SELECT UNUSED (Active track - sound pool only) Selects all the
sounds that are not used in a pattern in the project.
• DESELECT ALL Deselects all selected sounds in the list
• TOGGLE Enables write protection and security from deletion or

editing of the selected sound. This is indicated by the lock symbol
on each sound where write protection is applicable.
• SEND SYSEX Sends the selected sound over the midi channels to
an external sysex compatible deice. Used for back up and external
storage.
Use [FUNC] + [UP] [DOWN] for scrolling in larger sections
Multiple Sounds can be selected
Previous selected sound with keyboard

NOTES 3.4 Track Sounds
Creating synth sounds is an important and fundamental part of sound
design, where other elements that combine to build the track. Each of the 4
synth track contains an output stage AMP Envelope, 2 configurable and
routable modulation envelopes and 2 LFO’s. These modulation sources
form part of the synth track section and therefore are saved with the sounds
▌ QUICK ‘SAVE AS’ OF THE SOUND
1. Press [YES] + [SND] on MkII or [YES] + keyboard [D1] on MkI
2. Select the available sound slot and press [YES] to save or [NO] to
cancel.
3. Naming menu will appear.
▌ CLEARING THE TRACK SOUND (FX PARAM or CV PARAM)
1. Select track.
2. Press [SND] on MkII or [FUNC] + Keyboard [D1] on MkI to open sound

menu.
3. Scroll to CLEAR TRACK SOUND using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK

LEVEL). This will clear the parameters on the FX and CV Tracks.
4. Press [YES] to select and [YES] to confirm or [NO] to cancel.
5. All parameter pages are reset to defaults and when the kit is saved only
then will the clear be permanent.
▌ RENAMING ACTIVE TRACK SOUND
1. Select track
2. Press [SND] on MkII or [FUNC] + Keyboard [D1] on MkI to open sound

menu.
3. Scroll to RENAME TRACK SOUND using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK

LEVEL).
5. Use naming screen to rename the track and save.

3.5 General Sound Settings NOTES
Additional sound settings exist above the synth specific parameters.

These are contained in the SOUND MENU within the SETTINGS
area. Some of these settings will be specific to the track type i.e.
Synth, FX or CV.
▌ ADDING OSCILLATOR DRIFT - CLASSIC ANALOGUE WARMTH
1. Press [YES] + [SND] on MkII or [YES] + keyboard [D1] on MkI to open

the sound menu.
2. Scroll to SETTINGS using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
4. Scroll to the OSCILLATOR DRIFT check flag using [UP] [DOWN] or

(TRACK LEVEL).
5. Use [LEFT] [RIGHT] to change the oscillator drift setting ON (Checked)

or OFF.
▌ ADDING FILTER RESONANCE - LADDER FILTER
1. Press [SND] on MkII or [FUNC] + keyboard [D1] on MkI to open sound

menu.
2. Scroll to SETTINGS using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
4. Scroll to the F1 RESONANCE BOOST check flag using [UP] [DOWN]

or (TRACK LEVEL).
5. Use [LEFT] [RIGHT] to set filter boost ON (Checked) or OFF.
Ladder
Care should be taken with the F1 Resonance Boost
Filter
setting of the boosted resonance FLTR Resonance is boosted on the first
and ensure levels are controlled filter (ladder filter) and prior to
to protect any gear with the entering overdrive stage
potential peaks generated. Overdrive
FLTR

NOTES
▌ SETTING LEGATO MODE - TIED / JOINED NOTES
1. Press [YES] + [SND] MkII or [YES] + keyboard [D1] on MkI for the
sound menu,
2. Scroll to SETTINGS using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) and press

[YES] to select or [NO] to cancel.
3. Scroll to LEGATO MODE using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL)
4. Use [LEFT] [RIGHT] to change the mode setting ON (Checked) or OFF.
Legato
Plays overlapping notes (No spaces)

continuously with no envelopes re-
triggered.
Portamento
Slide between the pitch of two notes.

The time is governed by the SLI
parameter on OSC2 Page 2.
▌ SETTING PORTAMENTO MODE ON/OFF - NOTE SLIDE
1. Press [SND] on MkII or [FUNC] + keyboard [D1] on MkI to open sound

menu.
2. Scroll to SETTINGS using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) and press

3. Scroll to PORTAMENTO using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
4. Use [LEFT] [RIGHT] to set portamento ON (Checked) or OFF or set it to

LEGATO to allow only overlapping notes to be affected (Also needs to
have legato setting = On).
5. Open the NOTE SLIDE Menu [FUNC] + Bank [G] on MkII or [FUNC] +
Bank [C/G] on MkI.
6. Select TRIG to locate a SLIDE command.
7. The location of the TRIG with a SLIDE command means the slide will
occur from the previous TRIG step to the TRIG with the SLIDE set.

NOTES
▌ MIDI KEYBOARD SETTINGS
While MIDI and external connection is covered elsewhere in this guide, a

number of MIDI settings are also contained in the SOUND MENU >
SETTINGS. These are:-
• VELOCITY TO MIDI : How an external MIDI keyboard velocity will affect

the volume level of the sound. Off, Logarithmic, Linear or Exponential.
• VELOCITY MOD : Assigns parameters to be affected by the external

MIDI velocity input. Maximum 5 parameters can be set.
• PITCH BEND : Assigns parameters to be affected by the external MIDI

Pitch bend. Maximum of 5 parameters can be set.
• BREATH CONTROLLER : Assigns parameters to be affected by the

external MIDI breath controller input. Maximum 5 parameters can be
set.
• AFTERTOUCH : Assigns parameters to be affected by the external

MIDI Aftertouch. Maximum of 5 parameters can be set.
More details of keyboard related settings are covered in the Analog Keys
section.

3.6 Synthesizer - Overview
The fundamental synthesizer sounds are created, edited and developed from within 6 parameter
pages.
MK II MK I
Track 1 - 4 : 1 Voice Per Track
Oscillator Oscillator
1 AM & Sync
2
Sub Osc AM OSC2 P2 AM Sub Osc
OSC1 P1 OSC2 P1
Noise
OSC1 P2
Filter Envelope Envelope LFO1 LFO2
ENVF ENV2
Ladder ENV P1 ENV P2 LFO P1 LFO P2
Filter
FLTR
Osc 1 F/B
Multimode
Overdrive Filter AMP Amp Envelope
ENVA Pan
FLTR FLTR
AMP
Osc 2 F/B
(next track)
The LEV Level of each oscillator will determine the mix contribution of each oscillator to the full
output sound. Turning the oscillator level fully down is equivalent to the oscillator being off. Level
has no effect on the amplitude modulation function.

3.7 Oscillators 1 & 2 - Main Page 1
Press [OSC1] to select the oscillator 1 parameter page 1 and [OSC2] to select oscillator 2
parameter page 1. Both oscillators parameters contained on page 1 of each has the equivalent
parameters, layout and configuration.
Oscillator 1 & 2 Page 1
A TUN F WAV
Sets the oscillator pitch in semitones. Press (A) and Sets the oscillator waveform shape or selects one of
turn for larger increments. [FUNC] + (A) to change in the two external inputs.
octaves.
B FIN G SUB
Fine tuning of the oscillator in cents. One revolution Switches the sub oscillator off or to 1 or 2 octaves
of FIN is equivalent to 1 Semitone. below the oscillator pitch, 2 Pulse or 5th.
C DET H PW
Oscillator detune in hertz with reference to the Pulse width for adjusting the selected WAV
actual TUN position. Linear detune with emphasis waveform shape centre.
on bass frequencies.
D TRK I SPD
Key-tracking where the notes played reflect the Speed of the pulse width modulation internal within
pitch. Off plays notes without a relationship to pitch, the oscillator
like drum pads.
E LEV J PWM
Oscillator level. Can effect the timbre depending on Pulse width modulation is the depth of modulation
level. Higher levels are more gritty and more cleaner applied to PW - width of the wave shape and
sounds are found at lower levels change timbre

3.7 Oscillator 1 & 2 - Control Page 2
Press [OSC2] twice to select the common oscillator 1 and 2 control parameters which are on page 2
of oscillator 2. This page includes the synchronisation and cross modulation of both oscillators.
Oscillator 2 Page 2
A AM1 F AM2
Selects the amplitude modulation of oscillator 1 - Selects the amplitude modulation of oscillator 2 -
modulated by oscillator 2. modulated by oscillator 1.
B SMD G TRG
Synchronisation mode between the two oscillators. Oscillator retrigger, setting the start note
Osc1 to Sync to Osc2, Osc2 sync to Osc1 or Metal synchronisation so both start together and provide
sync to operate a synchronised reset on both greater impact.
C SNC H FAD
Synchronisation amount from a hard sync (highest Fade in or out of vibrato. 0 = constant vibrato, +
value) to soft sync, where other harmonics affect the Fade OUT and - Fade IN.
sync. 0 = no synchronisation.
D BND I SPD
Internal automatic bend setting to glide to its note. Speed of the vibrato function.
Also affected by SMD and only bends synchronised
osc.
E SLI J VIB
Slide time between notes for bend mode and also Vibrato amount setting.
when using portamento

3.8 Oscillator Waveforms NOTES
The oscillators have four waveforms include TRI - Triangle, SAW -

Sawtooth, PUL - Pulse / Square Wave, TRP - Transistor Pulse. The Analog
Four does not have a defined sine wave option.
AMPLITUDE
AMPLITUDE
TIME TIME
TRIANGLE WAVE (TRI) PULSE WAVE (PUL)

Fundamental frequency plus odd harmonics Similar to a square wave, odd harmonics but
giving a silky smooth, almost wood, wind with extended non symmetrical possibilities.
instrument like sound Nasal, hollow sounding.
AMPLITUDE
AMPLITUDE
TIME TIME
SAW TOOTH WAVE (SAW) TRANSISTOR PULSE (TRP)

Contains all harmonics giving a organ like, Unique wave almost a hybrid pulse and saw
brass instrument like sound tooth waveform
The oscillator 1 waveforms also have options of External Input Left - L, and Right - R,
and Feedback FDB Post Filter 1 section.
The oscillator 2 waveforms also have options of External Input Left - L, and Right - R,
and Neighbour - N where audio is routed from the previous track

NOTES 3.9 Sub Oscillators
Each oscillator has an accompanying sub oscillator which operates at a
layer below the main oscillator to provide a thicker bass sound or simulated
chord elements.
1OCT 2OCT
Adds a square wave oscillator ½ Adds a square wave oscillator ¼ of
of its speed and at 1 octave below its speed and at 2 octaves below the
the main oscillator root note main oscillator root note
5 th
2PUL 5th
Adds 25% of a pulse wave Adds 33% of a pulse wave
oscillator at 2 Octaves below oscillator at a perfect 5th (7
the main oscillator root note Semitones), 2/3 rate, below the
main oscillator root note
2 Oct 1 Oct 5th Root Note
Chords can be simulated by setting polyphony and oscillator 1, Oscillator 2 and

the Sub Oscillator to notes in the chord so that triads can be played from a
single trigger step. Also the other sub can be used for 4 note chords.
EXAMPLES
C Minor Chord, C - Eb - G: Osc 1 +7 Semitones, G Sub 5th, C Osc 2 +3 Semitones, Eb
C Major Chord, C - E - G: Osc 1 +7 Semitones, G Sub 5th, C Osc 2 +4 Semitones, E
F Major Chord, F - A - C: Osc 1 +0 Semitones, C Sub 5th, F Osc 2 -3 Semitones, A

3.10 Pulse Width Modulation NOTES
Pulse width modulation or PWM is built into both oscillator 1 & 2 parameter
sets and allows the PW, Width of any of the selected waveforms to
modulated at variable speeds, SPD.
PW
Sets the waveform centre or offset

essentially adjusting the pulse width
- 64 +
PWM SPD
Sets the depth of the Sets the speed of the

modulation from the ‘centre’ modulation oscillation that
position of PW affects PWM

NOTES 3.11 Amplitude Modulation
Amplitude modulation affects the volume level of one oscillator from the
dynamics of the other. AM1 and AM2 are settings that switch this feature
On/Off and additional settings can shape and tune the sound.
OSCILLATOR 1
OSCILLATOR 2
AM1
Oscillator 2 Modulates the

Amplitude of Oscillator 1
OSCILLATOR 1
OSCILLATOR 2
AM2
Oscillator 1 Modulates the

Amplitude of Oscillator 2
Notes
• Unlike LFO’s (Low Frequency Oscillators) the amplitude modulation sources are the
wave oscillators and therefore run at higher speeds and as such affect the timbre of the
sound.
• The volume level of the modulation oscillator does not affect the oscillators modulation
characteristics. Modulation will still occur if the source oscillator level if fully lowered.
The oscillators audible level can be heard in its own right with the level adjusted up.
• The pitch of the source modulation oscillator can be adjusted down to enable the
modulation to be audible through the destination oscillator being affected.
• Pulse width and pulse width modulation on the source modulation oscillator will affect
the audible oscillator sound.
• Both oscillators can be used in amplitude modulation as a source and destination by

setting both AM1 and AM2 on.

3.12 Oscillator Synchronisation NOTES
The Analog Four oscillators have several sync modes, SMD and also the
sync amount, SNC can be adjusted. Essentially this sets how and by how
much the oscillators are synchronised between each other.
Master SMD
OSCILLATOR 1
1 2
Oscillator 2 Synchronised to Oscillator 1.
Osc 2 Pitch will be controlled chromatically
from Osc 1 TUN and general harmonic
Frequency changes directly within Osc 2 TUN
Pitch
OSCILLATOR 2
SMD
METAL
Oscillators sync in a ‘special’ way
alternating the master / slave to add a
metallic harshness
OSCILLATOR 1
Frequency
Pitch
SMD
Master
OSCILLATOR 2
2 1
Oscillator 1 Synchronised to Oscillator 2.
Osc 1 Pitch will be controlled chromatically
from Osc 2 TUN and general harmonic
changes directly within Osc 1 TUN
SNC
Sync amount works at the maximum level of a hard sync locking closely to the
master oscillator frequency. At zero level no sync takes place. The adjustment
through the range develops a soft sync creating an instability in the slave locking to
various harmonics in varying degrees.

NOTES 3.13 FM Synthesis
The Analog Four is technically a subtractive synthesizer but a form of FM
(Frequency Modulation) Synthesis can be applied using the LFO
modulation. In the context of the Analog Four the FM Synthesis carrier, in
this case the main oscillator will be modulated by an LFO, in FM language
called a modulator.
Modulator
DST MUL DEP
LFO 1
LFO 1 Multiplier Depth (Speed)

Destination Pitch Fork 1 of Modulation
Frequency
Pitch
OSCILLATOR 1
OSC 1 OSC 1
Pitch Synchronised
with LFO
Carrier
DST
Why not experiment with the LFO destination for example using the oscillator level
for modulating the amplitude or other alternatives to be creative in sound design.

3.14 Noise Generator
Press [OSC1] twice to select the noise generator parameters which reside on oscillator 1, page 2.
Oscillator 1 Page 2
A SNH F Not Used
Sample and hold tuning of the noise spectrum N/A
B COL G Not Used
Colour, the filtering of the frequency generating the N/A

noise type
C FAD H Not Used
Fade in, - values and fade out + values. Zero level N/A
has no fade setting.
D Not Used I Not Used
N/A N/A
E LEV J Not Used
Noise generator level N/A

NOTES 3.15 Noise Characteristics
The convention when discussing audio noise refers to various types of
noise which generate different frequency content across the spectrum,
these are named by colours. The noise colour settings are adjusted with the
COL parameter and the definitions are:-
• White Noise: Equal power across all audio frequencies that are audible
to the human ear.
• Pink Noise: Similar to white noise but with lower levels of high
frequencies.
• Red Noise: Lowers the higher frequencies even more from pink noise.
Also called brown noise.
• Blue Noise: Lower in the low frequencies with a ramped up frequency

profile towards the higher audible frequency range
• Violet Noise: Even lower at bottom end than blue noise and steeper
ramp up the higher frequency range.
• Grey noise: Random frequencies in the white noise ranges.
COL
Sets the type of noise by adjusting the frequency content of the noise generator
-64 -32 0 +32 +64
RED NOISE WHITE NOISE VIOLET NOISE
frequency frequency frequency
-6db / Octave Filter Full Spectrum / No Filter +6db / Octave Filter
PINK NOISE BLUE NOISE
frequency frequency
-3db / Octave Filter +3db / Octave Filter

3.16 Oscillator Feedback NOTES
There are two feedback functions that provide input into the oscillators.
Feedback from the ladder filter output can be routed into Oscillator 1,
replacing the waveform. Also feedback from the multimode filter 2 output
can be routed into oscillator 2 of the following, next track.
Oscillator WAV Waveform Parameter Options.
FDB : Set in OSC 1 WAV. Selects feedback of the signal post filter 1 -
Ladder filter and routes into Oscillator 1. This replaces the waveform
selected as the oscillator.
NEI : Set in OSC 2 WAV. Selects feedback of the signal post filter 2 -
Multimode filter and routes it into Oscillator 2 of the next in line track (i.e.
Track 1 routes to Track 2).
From To Oscillator 2
To Oscillator 1
Oscillators of the next track
Ladder FDB NEI

Filter 1
Multimode
Overdrive Filter 2
To Amp
Notes on Feedback Routing
• Ensure that the LEV Level is set correctly on the oscillators and is also
accounting for feedback for example when Track 1 is routes to track 2.
• Track one oscillator 2 has does not have any routing as a previous track
does not exist. Therefore NEI Track 1 has no effect.
• OFF switches the oscillator fully off.
• AM functions continue to operate when setting the feedback options.
• By adjusting the feedback and filter characteristics self oscillation can

occur.
• External inputs can also be used instead of the oscillator waveforms

and feedback options.

NOTES
Feedback Routing
From
To Oscillator 1
Oscillators
Ladder
Track 1
Filter 1
Multimode
Overdrive Filter 2
To Amp
From
To Oscillator 1 To Oscillator 2
Oscillators
Ladder
Track 2
Filter 1
Overdrive Multimode
To Amp
Filter 2
From
Oscillators
Ladder
Track 3
Filter 1
Multimode
Overdrive Filter 2
To Amp
From
Oscillators
Ladder
Track 4
Filter 1
Multimode
Overdrive To Amp
Filter 2

3.17 Filters - Main Page 1
Press [FLTR] to select the filter parameter page. There are two filters within each sound engine
track. Filter 1, a low pass ladder filter, operates after the oscillators and inputs to the overdrive
function (also setup within this page) while Filter 2, a 2 pole multimode filter, connects the output of
the overdrive to the amp circuit. Both accessible through the FILTERS page.
Filter 1 & 2 Page
A FRQ F FRQ
Filter 1 : Low pass ladder cutoff frequency. Filter 2 : Multimode filter cutoff frequency.
B RES G RES
Filter 1 : Low pass ladder resonance. Filter 2 : Multimode filter resonance.
C OVR H TYP
Overdrive distortion post filter 1 / pre filter 2. Zero Type of filter for filter 2 selected from the 7 filter
value is a neutral clean setting. types available.
D TRK I TRK
Filter 1 : Key-tracking where the pitch of the notes Filter 2 : Key-tracking where the pitch of the notes
played reflect on the cutoff frequency. 32 filter tracks played reflect on the cutoff frequency. 32 filter tracks
osc freq. osc freq.
E DEP J DEP
Amount of modulation (+/-) from ENVF that affects Amount of modulation (+/-) from ENVF that affects
filter 1 cutoff frequency. The ENV envelope is hard filter 2 cutoff frequency. The ENV envelope is hard
coded to filter 1 irrespective of routing settings. coded to filter 2 irrespective of routing settings.

NOTES 3.18 Filter Types
The Analog Four contains two filters. Filter 1 is a 4-Pole low pass transistor
ladder filter while Filter 2 is a 2-Pole multimode filter with 7 filter types TYP
available to select.
FILTER 1 - 4-POLE LOW PASS LADDER
4 POLE LOW PASS

ATTENUATION
2 Pole 12dB/Octave Filter 1 is a 4-Pole filter. Poles refer to how

‘steep’ or aggressive the cutoff curve is. This is
measured in dB per Octave. A 4-Pole filter is a
4 Pole 24dB/Octave
more aggressive, less moderate filter than a 2-
Pole filter.
FREQUENCY
From
Oscillators
Filter Envelope
ENVF
Ladder ENV P1
Filter 1
FLTR
Multimode
Overdrive Filter 2 To Amp
FLTR FLTR
0
Clean / Neutral
-64 OVR +63

Soft Distortion Clipping Distortion
Filter 1 is less clean than Filter 2 and cannot be switched off. To neutralise Filter 1 set
the frequency cutoff FRQ to maximum to include all frequencies of the spectrum and
set RES resonance to 0. 25 is the default setting.
FRQ : Cut Off Frequency
CUTOFF & RESONANCE

ATTENUATION
RES : Resonance
Analog Four provides control with all filters of the

cutoff frequency and also the resonance
(emphasis at the cutoff point). Cutoff frequency
can also be adjusted tracking the keyboard pitch
Pass Band Transition Band Stop Band
FREQUENCY

NOTES
FILTER 2 - 2-POLE MULTIMODE
LP2 - 2 POLE LOW PASS FILTER

ATTENUATION
2 Pole 12dB/Octave TYP: 2-Pole low pass filter. This is measured as

12 dB per Octave and is a moderate and more
4 Pole 24dB/Octave typical filter clean type.
FREQUENCY
LP1 - 1 POLE LOW PASS FILTER

ATTENUATION
1 Pole 6dB/Octave TYP: 1-Pole low pass filter. This is measured as 6

dB per Octave and is even more moderate and
4 Pole 24dB/Octave less steep and unconventional
FREQUENCY
2 Pole 12dB/Octave HP2 - 2 POLE HIGH PASS FILTER

ATTENUATION
TYP: 2-Pole high pass filter. This is measured as

12 dB per Octave and is a moderate and more
4 Pole 24dB/Octave typical filter clean type.
FREQUENCY
HP1 - 1 POLE HIGH PASS FILTER

ATTENUATION
1 Pole 6dB/Octave
TYP: 1-Pole high pass filter. This is measured as

6 dB per Octave and is even more moderate and
4 Pole 24dB/Octave less steep and unconventional
FREQUENCY

NOTES
ATTENUATION BP - BAND PASS FILTER
Attenuates above and below the cutoff

frequency at a 6db / Octave and isolates
specific bands
FREQUENCY
BS - BAND STOP FILTER

ATTENUATION
Band stop, reject or notch filter. Allows lower

and higher frequencies to pass through the
filter and cuts off the mid, set frequencies.
Higher the resonance the narrower the notch
(lower settings have a more profound sound)
FREQUENCY
PK - PEAK FILTER
ATTENUATION
Narrow band boost of resonance at the cutoff

frequency. Highlights narrow, specific
frequencies.
FREQUENCY
Filter 2 is a cleaner filter and cannot be switched off. To neutralise Filter 2 set to no resonance and
the frequency cutoff on the high pass filters to minimum and low pass to maximum.

3.19 Overdrive NOTES
The Analog Four signal path contains and overdrive distortion between
Filter 1 and Filter 2. The overdrive parameter is contained within the [FLTR]
page.
Ladder
Filter 1
FLTR
Multimode
Overdrive Filter 2 To Amp
FLTR FLTR
OVR
0
Clean / Neutral
-64 +63
Soft Distortion Clipping Distortion
Parameter OVR is a single bi-polar control for Overdrive which adjusts the amount of
distortion from a softer distortion at the negative end of the control scale and a harsher
clipping distortion as the scale moves to the positive end. Zero level neutralises the
distortion and provides a clean signal path between the filters.

3.20 Amp - Main Page 1
The master output amplitude [AMP] page provides the parameters for adjusting the output ADSR
envelope, panorama, volume as well as output stereo effects send levels for chorus, delay and
reverb for the selected track.
Amplitude Page
A ATK F CHO
Attack time setting of the main output ADSR Send amount to the saturator wideshift chorus
envelope EnvA. effect.
B DEC G DEL
Decay time setting of the main output ADSR Send amount to the saturator delay effect.
envelope EnvA.
C SUS H REV
Sustain level setting of the main output ADSR Send amount to the saturator supervoid reverb.
envelope EnvA.
D REL I PAN
Release time setting of the main output ADSR Adjusts the L/R Panorama balance.
envelope EnvA.
E SHP J VOL
Shape of the output envelope EnvA from one of 12 Output volume from the amp section, separate to
optional shapes. This follows the same convention the track level.
as other Analog Four envelopes.

NOTES

4
Track Modulation
Modulation can unlock a powerful sound LFO’s and Envelopes exist not only in the synth
creative landscape and bring the sounds to life tracks but also for the FX and CV tracks too.
whether through sequenced melodies or While there are dedicated envelope pages for
evolving pads. Modulation refers to the ability tracks there are also in built envelopes within
to affect the parameters or features of one some functions such as the ADSR envelope
function controlled by another. This shapes or within the AMP section. Modulation is a key
modulates the sound to give movement and element in sound design and the Analog Four
change. The Analog Four has multiple has a deep feature set to support this.
modulation features including Low Frequency
Oscillators and Envelope functions. Multiple
LFO’s and Envelopes are embedded within the
Analog Four functionality especially within the
each of the audio tracks. The modulation within
the Analog Four have powerful routings to
connection functions together with over 60
destinations to choose from. There are also
multiple envelope and LFO settings and types.
Digging under the surface of the powerful
feature set can uncover many modulation
possibilities and help to create unique and
unusual sounds and complex audio structures.

4 Modulation
4.1 Envelope Settings Pages
Other than the Amp section, the EnvF and Env2 settings are contained within [ENV] pages 1 and 2
respectively. Both are ADSR envelopes but with the unique option to reshape the envelope.
Functions are the same for both envelopes. Same principles are also applied to Env1 and Env2 for
CV Track.
Envelope Pages
A ATK F LEN
Attack time setting of the ADSR envelope EnvF on Selects an alternative gate length of the envelope to
page 1 and Env2 on Page 2. that of the original trigger.
B DEC G DST
Decay time setting of the ADSR envelope EnvF on Assignable destination 1 for EnvF on Page 1 and
page 1 and Env2 on Page 2. Env2 on Page 2. Confirm selection with [YES].
C SUS H DEP
Sustain level setting of the ADSR envelope EnvF on Depth level of the first assignable envelope, set
page 1 and Env2 on Page 2. positive / negative levels that affect the destination
(Bipolar). EnvF is Page 1 and Env2 page 2.
D REL I DST
Release time setting of the ADSR envelope EnvF on Assignable destination 2 for EnvF on Page 1 and
page 1 and Env2 on Page 2. Env2 on Page 2. Confirm selection with [YES].
E SHP J DEP
Shape of the envelope, EnvF on page 1 and Env2 Depth level of the second assignable envelope, set
on Page 2. Options from one of 12 shapes. This positive / negative levels that effect the destination
follows the same convention for all Analog Four (Bipolar). EnvF is Page 1 and Env2 Page 2.
envelopes.
Copy, Clear and Paste options are available within the envelope pages

Modulation 4
4.2 Envelopes
The Analog Four has 3 ADSR envelopes per synth track each with a variety of shape options
making the Analog Four envelopes quite unique. EnvA is contained within the amplitude section
controlling the track main output. EnvF envelope is hard coded to both filters. Both EnvF and Env2
also have 2 freely assignable destinations each. 2 ADSR Envelopes Env1 and Env2 also exist for
the CV track.
EnvA - AMP Envelope
Multimode
Note ON Note OFF Filter 2
Amp EnvA is the AMP envelope

accessed in the AMP page. This
Vol
shapes the track output.
ATTACK DECAY SUSTAIN RELEASE

Pan
(time) (time) (level) (time)
EnvF - Filter Envelope
Note ON Note OFF

+63
EnvF is available in the ENV
Ladder
Filter 1
Page 1 and is hard coded to
both filters cutoff. The envelope
is bipolar and depth is set in the
Overdrive
filter FLTR page by DEP.
Multimode
0
ATTACK DECAY SUSTAIN RELEASE Filter 2
Amp
There are also 2 freely

Free assignable destinations for EnvF
-64 Assign that can be set up in the ENV
page with DEP adjusting depth.
Env2 - Envelope
Note ON Note OFF

+63
Env2 is available in the ENV

Free Page 2 and has 2 freely
Assign assignable destinations for the
envelope. The envelope is
0 bipolar set using DEP parameter.
ATTACK DECAY SUSTAIN RELEASE
-64

4 Modulation
4.3 Envelope Shapes
Envelopes are Attack, Decay, Sustain, Release but have the unique feature of adjusting the shape
characteristics with 12 shape SHP options from within the [ENV] or [AMP] pages. The numbered
setting symbol illustrates the style of Attack (left part) & Decay/Release (right part) setting.
Symbols with no dots = restart at trigger level Symbols with dots to left = restart at zero each trigger
0 Note ON Note OFF 1 Note ON Note OFF
ATTACK DECAY SUSTAIN RELEASE ATTACK DECAY SUSTAIN RELEASE

(time) (time) (level) (time) (time) (time) (level) (time)
Note ON Note OFF Note ON Note OFF

2 3


4 5

6 Note ON Note OFF 7 Note ON Note OFF


8 9

10 Note ON Note OFF

11 Note ON Note OFF


Modulation 4
NOTES 4.4 Using Envelopes
▌ BASIC SET UP OF THE FILTER ENVELOPE
1. Press [ENV] to open the EnvF Envelope page 1.
2. Select the SHP (E) to 0 as a routine ADSR Shape with linear slopes
and triggered at a level in line with the trigger level.
3. Adjust the A-D-S-R using (A) - (D) to a typical envelope starting point,
for example; Attack = 30, Decay = 50, Sustain = 60, Release = 60.
4. Set Length: LEN (F) = 0 to ensure natural envelope length is applied.
5. Press [FLTR] to select the Filter page.
6. Adjust depth DEP (E) for Filter 1 and depth DEP (J) for Filter 2. Start
with a maximum +63 setting for full envelope effect.
7. Adjust the Cutoff frequency Filter 1 (A) and Filter 2 (F) to ensure it
matches the sound required coupled with the effect of the envelopes.
8. Take an iterative process through steps 2-7 to shape the sound.
▌ BASIC SET UP OF AN ASSIGNABLE ENVELOPE
1. Press [ENV] twice to open the Env2 Envelope page 2. Note: this same
process can be applied for the assignable EnvF envelope.
2. Select the SHP (E) to 0 as a routine ADSR Shape with linear slopes
and triggered at a level in line with the trigger level.
3. Adjust the A-D-S-R using (A) - (D) to a typical envelope starting point,
eg ; Attack = 30, Dec = 50, Sustain = 60, Release = 60.
4. Set Length: LEN (F) = 0 to ensure natural envelope length is applied.
5. Set Depth - DEP (H) or (J) for the amount of influence, bipolar and
maximum +63 as a starting point.
6. Select the destination DST (G) or (I) to the element to be be influenced

by the filter and press [YES] to acknowledge selection.
7. Cycle through steps 2-5 to tune to the desired sound.

4 Modulation
4.5 Envelope Destinations NOTES
Envelopes destinations set for EnvF and Env2 using the DST parameter.
Page Parameter Destination

Meta None Off
OSC1 TUN Pitch Mod
OSC1 FIN Freq Mod
OSC1 DET Linear Detune
OSC1 TRK Keytrack
OSC1 LEV Oscillator Level
OSC1 WAV Oscillator Waveform
OSC1 SUB Sub Oscillator
OSC1 PW Pulse Width
OSC1 SPD Pulse Width Modulation Speed
OSC1 PWM Pulse Width Modulation Depth
OSC1 AM1 Oscillator 1 AM (Osc 2 Page 2)
OSC2 TUN Pitch Mod
OSC2 FIN Freq Mod
OSC2 TRK Keytrack
OSC2 PW Pulse Width
OSCX 1 & 2 Pitch Mod
OSCX 1 & 2 Frequency Mod
OSCX SMD Sync Mode
OSCX SNC Sync Amount
OSCX BND Bend Depth
OSCX SLI Note Slide Time
OSCX FAD Vibrato Fade
OSCX SPD Vibrato Speed
OSCX VIB Vibrato Depth

Modulation 4
NOTES 4.5 Envelope Destinations (continued)
Envelopes destinations set for EnvF and Env2 using the DST parameter.

NOISE SNH - S&H Sample & Hold
NOISE COL Noise Colour
NOISE FAD Fade In/Out
NOISE LEV Noise Generator Level
FILTER FRQ Filter F1 Frequency Cutoff
FILTER RES Filter F1 Resonance
FILTER DEP Filter F1 EnvF Depth
FILTER OVR Filter F1 Overdrive
FILTER Filter F1+F2 Frequencies
AMP ATK Amplitude Envelope A Attack Time
AMP DEC Amplitude Envelope A Decay Time
AMP SUS Amplitude Envelope A Sustain Level
AMP REL Amplitude Envelope A Release Time
AMP SHP Envelope A Shape
AMP CHO Amp Send to Chorus
AMP DEL Amp Send to Delay
AMP REV Amp Send to Reverb
AMP PAN Amp Pan
AMP VOL Amp Volume
AMP Amp Accent Level
Additional envelope destinations for Env2 only

ENV F ATK Attack Time
ENV F DEC Decay Time
ENV F SUS Sustain Level
ENV F REL Release Time
ENV F SHP Shape
ENV F DEP Depth A
ENV F DEP Depth B
LFO 1 SPD Speed
LFO 1 MUL Multiplier
LFO 1 FAD Fade In / Out
LFO 1 SPH Start Phase
LFO 1 DEP Depth A
LFO 1 DEP Depth B

4 Modulation
4.6 LFO Settings Pages
Each synth, FX and CV track contains 2 Low Frequency Oscillators which are used to modulate
other track settings. Each LFO can be assigned to 2 destinations. LFO1 is contained on Page 1 and
LFO2 on Page 2 of the parameters selected using [LFO]
LFO Pages
A SPD F WAV
Speed of LFO sync’ed with Tempo BPM. This is a bipolar Waveform selection for the LFO.
setting where negative values reverse the LSO shape.
B MUL G DST
Multiplier of the SPD parameter. A dot value syncs to a Assignable destination 1 for LFO1 on page 1 and LFO2 on
fixed 120BPM. Tuning fork syncs to oscillator 1. X page 2.
multiplies by current tempo.
C FAD H DEP
Allows a Fade In (-ve) and Fade Out (+ve). Zero level is no Depth level of the first assignable LFO, set positive /
fade. negative levels that affect the destination (Bipolar). LFO1 is
page 1 and LFO2 on page 2.
D SPH I DST
Start phase of where, across the waveform the LFO will be Assignable destination 2 for LFO1 on page 1 and LFO2 on
triggered. page 2.
E MOD J DEP
Trigger mode setting of how the LFO will operate upon a Depth level of the second assignable LFO, set positive /
trigger event. negative levels that effect the destination (Bipolar). LFO1
is page 1 and LFO2 page 2.
Copy, Clear and Paste options are available within the envelope pages

Modulation 4
NOTES 4.7 LFO Trigger Modes
Set using the MOD (F) Parameter in the LFO Page
Trigger Trigger
AMPLITUDE FRE - Free Running
LFO runs freely and continuously and

ignores any trig start / stop events.
TIME
Trigger Trigger
TRG - Triggered
AMPLITUDE
The LFO restarts from its start position

when a note event is triggered.
TIME
Trigger Trigger Trigger

HLD - Hold
AMPLITUDE
LFO runs freely in the background. The

current value in the cycle is held when a
note is triggered until the next note is
triggered where it will switch to hold the
cycle position at the new trigger
TIME
Trigger
ONE - One Cycle
AMPLITUDE
LFO runs from the start when triggered

and runs for one cycle only
TIME
Trigger
HLF - Half Cycle
AMPLITUDE
LFO runs from the start when triggered

and runs for only half of one cycle
TIME

4 Modulation
4.8 LFO Waveforms NOTES
A selection of waveforms are available for the LFO, set in the WAV (F)
Parameter.
AMPLITUDE
AMPLITUDE
TIME TIME
SIN - Sine Wave SQU - Square Wave

AMPLITUDE
AMPLITUDE
TIME TIME
TRI - Triangle EXP - Exponential

AMPLITUDE
AMPLITUDE
TIME TIME
SAW - Saw RMP - Ramp

AMPLITUDE
TIME
RND - Random

Modulation 4
NOTES 4.9 Using LFO’s
Each Track has 2 LFO’s each with the option for 2 destinations.
▌ BASIC SET UP OF AN LFO
1. Press [LFO] to open the LFO1 page 1. Double press to select Page 2
for LFO2.
2. Select the DST by turning (G) or (I) depending which is required and set
the destination to affect by the LFO.
3. Select MOD (E) for the mode required.
4. Adjust WAV to select the desired LFO wave shape.
5. Adjust DEP by turning (H) or (J) for the amount of LFO to affect the
destination or inverse using negative values.
6. Modify SPD Speed and MUL to multiply to appropriate setting. Also

adjust FAD to fade in or out.
7. Take an iterative process through steps 2-7 to shape the sound as

required and listen to the sound during adjustments.

4 Modulation
4.10 Synth LFO Destinations NOTES
A selection of destinations are available for each Synth track LFO, set in the
DST (G) and (I) Parameter. CV LFO’s are covered in the CV section.
Meta None Off
OSC1 TUN Pitch Mod
OSC1 FIN Freq Mod
OSC1 TRK Keytrack
OSC1 PW Pulse Width
OSC2 TUN Pitch Mod
OSC2 FIN Freq Mod
OSC2 TRK Keytrack
OSC2 PW Pulse Width
OSCX 1 & 2 Pitch Mod
OSCX 1 & 2 Frequency Mod
OSCX SMD Sync Mode
OSCX SNC Sync Amount
OSCX BND Bend Depth
OSCX SLI Note Slide Time
OSCX FAD Vibrato Fade
OSCX SPD Vibrato Speed
OSCX VIB Vibrato Depth
NOISE SNH - S&H Sample & Hold
NOISE COL Noise Colour
NOISE FAD Fade In/Out
NOISE LEV Noise Generator Level

Modulation 4
NOTES 4.10 Synth LFO Destinations (continued)
FILTER OVR Filter F1 Overdrive
FILTER Filter F1+F2 Frequencies
AMP ATK Amplitude Envelope A Attack Time
AMP DEC Amplitude Envelope A Decay Time
AMP SUS Amplitude Envelope A Sustain Level
AMP REL Amplitude Envelope A Release Time
AMP SHP Amplitude Envelope A Shape
AMP CHO Amp Send to Chorus
AMP DEL Amp Send to Delay
AMP REV Amp Send to Reverb
AMP PAN Amp Pan
AMP VOL Amp Volume
AMP Amp Accent Level
ENV F ATK EnvF Attack Time
ENV F DEC EnvF Decay Time
ENV F SUS EnvF Sustain Level
ENV F REL EnvF Release Time
ENV F SHP EnvF Shape
ENV F DEP EnvF Depth A
ENV F DEP EnvF Depth B
Additional envelope destinations for LFO2 only

ENV 2 ATK Attack Time
ENV 2 DEC Decay Time
ENV 2 SUS Sustain Level
ENV 2 REL Release Time
ENV 2 SHP Shape
ENV 2 DEP Depth A
ENV 2 DEP Depth B
LFO 1 SPD Speed
LFO 1 DEP Depth A
LFO 1 DEP Depth B

NOTES

5
Sound Performance
While the basics of the Analog Four synths and settings helps when developing your own
their sound design features have been workflow. These features support both studio
covered, this section goes a layer deeper and and live performance well. Designing the right
into the performance features of the sound sounds and creating unique audio palettes is
system. It covers how sounds are organised one thing, but applying the sounds in a creative
into kits for faster workflow and managing and effective manner can also add to the sonic
sound collections. Polyphony in the context of performance of the Analog Four.
the Analog Four is explained along with
examples of how voicing within the device is
set up and automatically managed.
Performance mode covers how sound
parameters can be combined under individual
controls and create macros for getting the best
from the Analog Four both in a live
performance or studio environment. MkII
Model has some enhanced performance
functionality with the addition of the QPER
(Quick Performance) function, a dedicated
macro control that can be configured to
change multiple parameters at the same time.
Storing macros and creating a library of useful

5 Sound Performance
5.1 Kits NOTES
Kits are a combination of all four Synth tracks, FX and CV track plus level
and performance settings assembled into a singular collection. This makes
sound design and organising tracks more manageable. A pattern is always
linked to a kit.
Pattern
Kit
T6 T5 T1 T2 T3 T4
CV FX Synth Synth Synth Synth
Sounds
Polyphony
Levels
Performance Settings
A Kit is a collection of 4 Synth Tracks and Settings and 1 FX and 1 CV Track

(max128 kits per project)
▌ LOADING A NEW KIT FROM PROJECT KITS
1. Press [KIT] on MkII or [FUNC] + keyboard [C1] on MkI.
2. Select LOAD KIT using [UP] [DOWN] or (LEVEL) press [YES] to select
kit browser or [NO] to cancel
3. Use [UP] [DOWN] or (LEVEL) to highlight the required kit from the list of
128. Press and turn (LEVEL) for bigger steps through the list.
4. Press [YES] on the highlighted kit to load it or [NO] to cancel.
Note:
• Kits that are not linked to a pattern are shown in the kit browser with a asterisk
symbol after the kit name.
• Copy, Clear and Paste commands using the [FUNC] + PLAY, REC and STOP are
available when working with kits.

Sound Performance 5
NOTES
▌ QUICK RELOADING A KIT
1. To quickly reload active kit to its default position press [NO] + [KIT] on
MkII or [NO] + keyboard [C1] on MkI.
▌ RELOADING ACTIVE KIT FROM MENU
1. Press [KIT] on MkII or [FUNC] + Keyboard [C1] on MkI.
2. Select RELOAD using [UP] [DOWN] or (LEVEL) and press [YES] to

select or [NO] to cancel.
▌ SAVING A KIT
2. Select SAVE KIT using [UP] [DOWN] or (LEVEL) and press [YES] to
3. Use [UP] [DOWN] or (LEVEL) to highlight an open kit slot from the list
of 128. Press and turn (LEVEL) for bigger steps through the list.
4. Press [YES] on the highlighted slot to open the naming menu and [YES]
to save it or [NO] to cancel.
▌ QUICK SAVING THE CURRENT KIT
1. To quickly save the kit to the active pattern press [YES] or [FUNC] +
[KIT] on MkII or [NO] + keyboard [C1] on MkI.
▌ CLEARING THE ACTIVE KIT (RESET)
2. Select CLEAR KIT using [UP] [DOWN] or (LEVEL) and press [YES] to
clear or [NO] to cancel.
3. Press [YES] to confirm clear or [NO] to cancel.

5 Sound Performance
NOTES
▌ COPYING AND PASTING KITS
1. Press [KIT] on MkII or [FUNC] + keyboard [C1] MkI for kit menu.
2. Highlight the LOAD KIT or SAVE KIT option and press [YES] to select.
3. Scroll to the ‘source’ kit to copy using [UP] [DOWN] [LEFT] [RIGHT] or
(LEVEL) to highlight the kit slot to copy.
4. Press [FUNC] + [REC] to copy the highlighted kit. Message is indicated

for copy.
5. Scroll to ‘destination’ slot kit to paste to using [UP] [DOWN] [LEFT]

[RIGHT] or (LEVEL) to highlight a kit slot to paste into.
6. Press [FUNC] + [STOP] to paste the copied kit to the highlighted slot
7. Select [YES] to confirm overwriting the slot with the copied kit or [NO] to
cancel.
▌ RENAMING THE CURRENT KIT
2. Select SAVE KIT using [UP] [DOWN] or (LEVEL) and press [YES] to
3. Select the original slot destination to overwrite the kit.
4. Press [YES] on the highlighted slot to open the naming menu and [YES]
to save it with the new name or [NO] to cancel.

Sound Performance 5
NOTES 5.2 Polyphony
In normal operation the Analog Four is a monophonic device where each of
the 4 synth tracks is driven by 1 voice each and hence 1 note played at a
time. However it can be configured so that each track can use 1, 2, 3 or 4
of the voices to create a polyphonic track. Polyphonic meaning multiple
simultaneous voices i.e. chords, can be played. Polyphony settings are
stored with the kit.
Single Voice Four Voice

MONOPHONIC TRACK POLYPHONIC
Voice 1 Track 1 Voice 1, 2, 3, 4
Single voice assigned to each A combination of up to 4 voices

track - default 1 per track. can be assigned to each track.
Single Voice, Only one note Multiple voice, multiple notes played
played at once. Next note takes simultaneously. Chords with number of
over from last notes to match polyphony
Voices 1 2 3 4 Voices 1 X 2 X 3 4
Voices 1 X 2 X 3 X 4
Voices 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X
Voices 1 X 2 3 4 X
Single voice by default

Polyphonic examples
allocated to each track

5 Sound Performance
NOTES
▌ SETTING UP POLYPHONY VOICES
1. Press [KIT] on MkII or [FUNC] + keyboard [C1] for menu.
2. Select the POLY CONFIG option and press [YES] or [NO] to cancel.
3. In the poly config menu the first four trig keys indicate the status of the
VOICES. Pressing the trig toggles the Voice selection On/Off for each
voice. Alternatively follow steps 4-6.
4. Highlight the VOICES option using [UP] [DOWN] or (LEVEL).
5. Highlight to select each voice using [LEFT] [RIGHT].
6. Press [YES] to toggle each voice ON - X or OFF.
▌ CHANGING VOICE ALLOCATION
1. Press [KIT] on MkII or [FUNC] + keyboard [C1] for menu.
3. Highlight to select the ALLOCATION option using [UP] [DOWN] or

(LEVEL).
4. Adjust the allocation option using [LEFT] [RIGHT].
5. Options are:-
• RESET : Allocated first available voice then the next one

incrementally.
• ROTATE : Allocates next available voice cyclically.
• REASSIGN : Uses the oldest note or the same as the one used last.
• UNISON : Assigns all voices to the note that is played and uses pan
spread and detune settings from within the POLY CONFIG menu.
NOTE: In Poly Config mode the first 4 trig keys indicate the status of the 4 voices
with a low lit LED. Medium bright lit LED shows that the equivalent voice is
selected. Fully bright LED when a voice is activated i.e. a key is pressed.

Sound Performance 5
POLY CONFIG : ALLOCATION MODE
Note On Note Off
RESET C
Note Duration
Example has the 4 voices selected for polyphony named here as A,B,C,D
representing 1,2,3,4 Voice. Reset mode allocates lowest available voice first and 1 Order Note Played
then the next available one in incremental fashion i.e A, B, C, D, A, B etc. Voices
are released when the note is released. Voices are ‘stolen’ or reclaimed in lowest to
highest order when more than 4 notes are played continuously (4 voice max). A Voice Allocated to Note A = 1
Examples assume voice A is first available.
In this example, playing a single discrete C note on / off will allocate the lowest voice, in this case, Voice A as this is always
available after the prior note and voice is released.
C C C
1 2 3
A A A
In this example, track 1, playing and holding single discrete C note will allocate the lowest voice i.e. Voice A. Adding a second
note D will allocate voice B as the next lowest available and creating a chord by adding note E will allocate the third voice C. As
each note is released the voice is also released making the lowest available for the next note trigger. Starting voice will be same
as track, i.e. Track 3 will start on voice 3.
A D
B E F
3 5
C F A

5 Sound Performance
Note On Note Off
ROTATE C
Note Duration
Example has the 4 voices selected for polyphony named here as A,B,C,D.
Rotate mode allocates voices cyclically as notes are played and then continues 1 Order Note Played
in this fashion i.e A, B, C, D, A, B etc. Voices are released when the note is
released. Voices are ‘stolen’ or reclaimed cyclically when more than 4 notes are
played continuously (4 voice max). Examples assume voice A is first available. A Voice Allocated to Note A = 1
In this example, playing a single discrete C note on / off will allocate the next available voice, in this case, Voice A and although
this is always available after the prior note and voice is released the allocation will cycle or rotate to the next voice. In this example
voices A-B-C are used for discrete note C.
C C C
1 2 3
A B C
In this example, playing and holding single discrete C note will allocate the first available voice i.e. Voice A . Adding second note D
will allocate voice B as the next available and creating a chord by adding note E will allocate the third voice C. As each note is
released the voice is also released however the allocation will cycle through the voices so the first note F (played with E) will
allocate Voice D and revert to voice A when played alone
A D
B E F
3 5
C F A

Sound Performance 5
Note On Note Off
REASSIGN C
Note Duration
Example has the 4 voices selected for polyphony named here as A,B,C,D.
Reassign mode allocates voices based on the latest, more recent note being 1 Order Note Played
played. Voices are released when the note is released. Voices are ‘stolen’ or
reclaimed cyclically when more than 4 notes are played continuously (4 voice
max). Examples assume voice A is first available. A Voice Allocated to Note A = 1
In this example, playing a single discrete C note on / off will allocate the last available voice used, in this case, Voice A. This
becomes available each time the prior note and voice is released. The allocation will use the last used available voice. In this
example voice A will be allocated each time
C C C
1 2 3
A A A
In this example, playing and holding single discrete C note will allocate the oldest available voice e.g. Voice A . Adding second
note D will allocate voice B as the next available and creating a chord by adding note E will allocate the third voice C. As each
note is released the voice is also released however the allocation will cycle through the voices based on the oldest available. The
first note F (played with E) will therefore allocate Voice D as the next available and voice D when played alone. Starting again
from C will this time allocate voice A as the one most recently available. Illustration assumes first available is A.
A D
B E F
3 5
C F D

5 Sound Performance
Note On Note Off
UNISON C
Note Duration
Example has the 4 voices selected for polyphony named here as A,B,C,D. Unison
mode allocates all available voices to each note played and then continues in this
fashion for other notes played. Voices are released when the note is released and
1 Order Note Played
stolen back for each new note played. In the Poly Config menu, UNISON DETUNE
thickens the note by detuning between the voices. UNISON PAN SPREAD widens the
stereo pan of the voices to create a more expansive sound A Voice Allocated to Note A = 1
In this example, playing a single discrete C note on / off will allocate the all (A<B,C,D) voices to each note played. ,
C C C
1 2 3
A A A
B B B
C C C
D D D
In this example, playing and holding single discrete C note will allocate the first available voice i.e. Voice A . Adding second note D
will allocate voice B as the next available and creating a chord by adding note E will allocate the third voice C. As each note is
released the voice is also released however the allocation will cycle through the voices so the first note F (played with E) will allocate
Voice D and revert to voice A when played alone
1 A
Unison Detune - Pitch
B
A D
B C
C 2 D
Unison Pan Spread
D A
All notes stolen back
E
B
C 3
D A
F F
B
C 4 5
D A A
B B
C C
D D

Sound Performance 5
NOTES
▌ SETTING UP UNISON ALLOCATION
1. Press [KIT] on MkII or [FUNC] + keyboard [C1] for kit menu.
3. In the poly config menu the first four trig keys indicate the status of the
voices. Pressing to toggle the voice selection On/Off for each voice or
follow steps 4 -6.
4. Highlight to select the ALLOCATION option using [UP] [DOWN] or

(LEVEL).
5. Select UNISON using [LEFT] [RIGHT].
6. Scroll to highlight UNISON DETUNE and adjust using the (LEVEL)

[LEFT] [RIGHT] or a DATA ENTRY control to a value between 0-127. It
is advised to adjust by ear rather than by numbers.
7. Scroll to highlight UNISON PAN SPRD and adjust using the (LEVEL)
[LEFT] [RIGHT] or a DATA ENTRY control to a value between 0-127. It
is advised to adjust by ear rather than by numbers.
▌ FORCING POLYPHONY TO PLAY TRACK SOUNDS
1. Press [KIT] on MkII or [FUNC] + keyboard [C1] for kit menu.
3. Highlight to select the USE TRK SOUNDS option using [UP] [DOWN] or
(LEVEL).
4. Toggle the selected option using [LEFT] [RIGHT].
5. With this option checked the sounds for each track with an assigned
voice will play its own sounds and not the polyphony of the selected
track sound. In Unison allocation mode all track sounds will play. In
other allocation modes the track specific to the voice will play.

5 Sound Performance
5.3 Performance Mode NOTES
Performance mode enables setting up macro controls using the 10 data

entry rotary controls by assigning a maximum of 5 parameters for each
control. The parameters assigned can be from any of the tracks. The
performance settings are saved with a kit. The macros cannot be parameter
locked.
1 2 3 4 5
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Performance Setup Page

(Date Entry View)
Performance Patch
Name
Track
Function / Parameter
Data Entry
Control Macro
Example ‘H’
5 Parameters
Assignable to each Data Entry
macro
Data Entry Control Macro Parameter Depth

Default range in 0-127 but can The set up of the depth of each
also be set Bi-Polar -64+63 parameter within the combined macro
0 127
-64 +63
Use (TRACK LEVEL) to The performance macro

Use Data Entry (A) - (E) to
adjust within the setup can be renamed within the
set up each parameter
window. Revert to Data setup menu. Parameter
within the setup window.
Control when in normal use names are fixed

Sound Performance 5
NOTES
▌ SETTING UP A PERFORMANCE MACRO
1. Press [FUNC] + [PERF] for the performance setup menu.
2. Select the PERF CONFIGURE option using [UP][DOWN] and press

3. Macro’s can be assigned to each of the 10 data entry controls. Use [UP]
[DOWN] to scroll and highlight the desired data entry (A) .... (J).
4. Press [YES] to select and to open the parameter set up page for the
highlighted data entry macro. In this page the (TRACK LEVEL) adjusts
the macro and the data entry controls enable parameter set up.
5. To set the macro range between linear 0-127 or bi-polar -64 to +63
press (TRACK LEVEL) to toggle the option.
6. Select the TRACK for the parameter to add by pressing the data entry
(A) - (E) representing one of the 5 parameter slots.
7. Assign the parameter from the track selected in step 6 by rotating the
data entry (A) - (E) control. Scroll to the desired parameter and press
8. Adjust the depth amount (offset from the original parameter setting) for
each parameter by turning data entry (F) - (J). Note that for Parameter 1
(A) and (F) are used for set up. Parameter 2 (B) and (G) etc.
9. Play a note using the keyboard or play a sequence and adjust (TRACK
LEVEL) to preview settings within the set up page.
10. Exit / Back up from the set up pages using [NO].

5 Sound Performance
NOTES
▌ PERFORMANCE MACROS IN USE
1. Press [PERF] for performance mode.
2. The performance page will display all 10 performance macros and their
names which can be adjusting with the respective DATA ENTRY control
(A) … (J).
TRIG Keys Mute Tracks in

Performance Mode
▌ MUTING TRACKS WITHIN PERFORMANCE MODE
2. The performance page will display all 10 performance macros and their
names and also the [TRIG] Keys 1-6 will now represent tracks 1-6 mute
state.
3. Press TRIG [1] - [6] to mute / unmute tracks 1-6.
4. The mute state is indicated as
• Trig fully lit and shown on the display with an outlined square
indicating that the track is audible and unmuted.
• Trig lit dim and on the display a minus sign indicates track is
inaudible and muted. Track led also shows mute state off.

Sound Performance 5
NOTES
▌ DELAYED MUTING OF TRACKS WITHIN PERFORMANCE MODE
2. The performance page will display all 10 performance macros and

names but also the [TRIG] Keys 1-6 will now represent tracks 1-6 mute
state.
3. Press and Hold [FUNC] + press TRIG [1] - [6] Keys to maintain the mute
state while the FUNC key is held.
4. The mute state will operate with [FUNC] held as follows:-
• Unmuted tracks will stay unmuted and indicated by a blinking, dim lit
trig and an asterisk on the display. When [FUNC] is released the
unmuted tracks will switch to being muted.
• Muted tracks will stay muted and indicated by trig lit dim and on the
display with a plus sign. When [FUNC] is released muted tracks will
switch to being unmuted.
Note: This works for individual or a selection of any of the first 6 TRIG
keys to mute any of the 6 tracks where the [FUNC] key will toggle the
mute state.
▌ RENAMING A PERFORMANCE MACRO
1. Press [FUNC] + [PERF] for the performance setup menu.
2. Select the PERF RENAME Option using [UP][DOWN] and press [YES]
to select or [NO] to cancel.
3. Macro’s can be assigned to each of the 10 data entry controls which

can also be named individually. Use [UP] [DOWN] to scroll and highlight
the desired data entry (A) .... (J).
4. Press [YES] to select and to open the renaming page for the highlighted
data entry macro. The macro can be reamed using the naming tool.

5 Sound Performance
5.4 Performance Mixer NOTES
The performance mixer is a page where the collection of track levels are on
display together and can be controlled via the DATA ENTRY controls.
▌ USING THE PERFORMANCE MIXER
1. Press [MIX] in MkII to open the performance mixer page. For MkI select
[PERF] & [PERF] for Page 2 of the performance pages.
2. Adjust data entry (A) - (E) for setting the relevant level for synth tracks
1-4 and FX track.
• Performance muting option using Trig [1] - [6] is also available within
this page.
• The volume levels shown in the mixer are the same levels as found
in the AMP Page, level parameter for each track.

Sound Performance 5
NOTES 5.5 Quick Performance Mode MK II
Quick performance mode is an addition to performance mode found only in

MkII Analog Four which allows a dedicated control of one or more
performance macros outside of the performance mode screen.
The depth amount 1 of the 10 performance macros can be assigned to quick

of the macro performance control using the TRIG keys 1-10
▌ SETTING UP A QUICK PERFORMANCE MACROS
1. Press and hold [QPER].
2. With [QPER] Held, press trig [1] - [10] to select one of the performance
macros.
3. With [QPER] Held, press trig [1] - [10] to select additional performance
macros to add to the control.
4. Release [QPER]. The macros selected will now be available for control.
Previous quick performance settings will be superseded by the each
new control set.

5 Sound Performance
NOTES
▌ USING A QUICK PERFORMANCE MACRO
1. Adjust the control [QUICK PERF AMOUNT] to set the amount that the
control will be applied to the tracks. This single macro control operates
outside of performance mode.
▌ MUTING PERFORMANCE MACROS
1. Press [FUNC] + [QPER] to mute performance mode. This reverts all

parameters to the normal state without the macro performance settings.
The key is unlit.
2. Press [FUNC] + [QPER] again to unmute performance mode. This

reverts all parameters to the macro settings. The key turns green.

Sound Performance 5
NOTES 5.6 Tracks
Track options can provide control of track functionality but also add to the
creativity and performance options.
Track Key Indicators

Key Colour Key Status Mode
None Unlit Muted track / Inaudible track (not selected)
Green Lit Unmuted / Audible track (not selected)
Red Lit Active unmuted / Audible track (selected)
Yellow Lit Active muted / Inaudible track (selected)
Note: When in the first level of the FX track the previously active track operated by the
KEYBOARD will illuminate in a less bright / dimmed state. The second level of FX, pressing
[FX] again, will enable the KEYBOARD to control the FX track fully and directly
▌ SELECTING SYNTH OR CV TRACKS
1. Press track key [T1] - [T4] or [CV] to select the track.
2. Editing can be performed on the selected track, synth settings for T1-T4
and CV Controls, envelopes and LFO within the CV track.
▌ SELECTING FX TRACKS
1. Press track key [FX] to select the track. This will indicate both the prior
track dimmed (the KEYBOARD is linked to this prior track) and FX track
lit bright.
2. Press track key [FX] again to fully select the track. This will enable
KEYBOARD to play the FX track directly.
3. Editing can be performed on the selected FX track for chorus, delay,

reverb, external in and LFO.

5 Sound Performance
NOTES
▌ MUTING TRACKS
1. Press [FUNC] + track [T1] - [T4] or [FX] or [CV] to toggle MUTE and
again for UNMUTE of the track.
• LED’s indicate track status.
• Performance mode also provides a track muting function.
• Muting only mutes the sequences trigs so KEYBOARD notes are

still heard if played manually.
▌TRANSPOSING A TRACK
1. Select track.
2. Ensure that the track can be transposed. This is set in the note setup
menu or hold [TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII + Track [1]...[6] to
quickly enable transpose.
3. Press & Hold [TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII + KEYBOARD note.
4. Press & Hold [TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII + [LEFT] [RIGHT] to

transpose. Keyboard indicates note.
5. Display pop-up will show transpose status.
6. [FUNC] + [TRNS] or [TRANSPOSE] will lock transposition mode for one

handed operation.
7. Press [TRANSPOSE] on MkI or [TRNS] MkII + [PLAY] to clear

transpose status.

Sound Performance 5
NOTES 5.7 Randomizing Parameters
The ability to randomize the parameter page settings for all tracks is
possible in Analogue Four with OSC1, OSC2, FLTR, AMP, ENV and LFO
parameters.
▌RANDOMIZING PARAMETER PAGE SETTINGS
1. Select the desired parameter page to randomise e.g. [OSC1].

Randomisation will only apply to the selected visible page. Select the
actual page desired in focus if more than one page exists in a function
i.e. OSC1 P1, OSC1 P2 Noise.
2. Press the parameter [PAGE] + [YES] to shuffle / randomise the settings

of the page. Example [OSC1] + [YES].
3. Try various iterations to find a satisfactory setting or use to randomise

during live play.
▌RESETTING THE RANDOMIZED SETTINGS OF A PARAMETER PAGE
1. After randomising a parameter page settings, e.g. filter page [OSC1].
2. Press the parameter page eg [OSC1] + [NO] to restore the page to its
previously saved state.

5 Sound Performance
NOTES
Parameters to Randomize.
Page Parameter Page Settings Randomizable

OSC1 - P1 Tun, Fin, Det, Trk, Lev, Wav, Sub, PW, Spd, PWM.
OSC1 - P2 Noise Snh, Col, Fad, Lev
OSC2 - P1 Tun, Fin, Det, Trk, Lev, Wav, Sub, PW, Spd, PWM.
OSC2- P2 Common Am1, Smd, Snc, Bnd, Sli, Am2, Trg, Fad, Spd, Vib
FLTR Frq, Res, Ovr, Trk, Dep. Frq, Res, Typ, Trk, Dep
AMP Atk, Dec, Sus, Rel, Shp, Cho, Del, Rev
LFO1 - P1 Spd, Mul, Fad, Sph, Mod, wav, Dst, Dep, Dst, Dep
LFO2 - P2 Spd, Mul, Fad, Sph, Mod, wav, Dst, Dep, Dst, Dep
ENVF - P1 Atk, Dec, Sus, Rel, Shp, Len, Dst, Dep, Dst, Dep
ENV2 - P2 Atk, Dec, Sus, Rel, Shp, Len, Dst, Dep, Dst, Dep
Chorus Pre, Spd, Dep, Wid, Fdb, Hpf, Lpf, Del, Rev
Delay Tim, X, Wid, Hpf, Lpf, Ovr, Rev
Reverb Pre, Dec, Frq, Gai, Hpf, Lpf
CV CV Parameters can be randomised - dependant on config
Perf All macro controls inline with available options stated above
At the time of writing, randomization does not affect the ARP and NOTE pages.

Sound Performance 5

NOTES

6
Pattern Basics
Patterns are a very powerful and integral sequencer is the tool for managing this
element within Analog Four these are arranged functionality. Add to this the power of the Analog
within its sequencer and its associated feature Four’s trig options including trig locks, parameter
set. The sequencer organises and controls locks, micro tuning and the power is there for all
patterns to form rhythmic elements and to to see. Getting to know the elements that
develop evolving sounds and arrangements. quickly get up and running with patterns is the
Pattern sequencing is a notable function that is main objective of this section leaving the
central to most Elektron devices. While it is advanced features for later in this book. As
important to get to know the components always the sections offer space and
within a pattern it is arguably better to placeholders for your own notes and comments.
understand the overall sequencing concept
and its practical nature before diving deeper.
This section therefore provides the basics in
building patterns and offers a quick start to
using Analog Four sequencing before going
deeper into the workflow and also before
discussing the finer details and sub elements
and functions. It is important to know that
patterns and the sequencer are inextricably
linked. A sequence is in fact the formation of
steps into a pattern and Analog Four’s

6 Pattern Basics
6.1 Key Pattern Concepts & Features
The sequencing of a patterns uses trigs which are steps in the sequence that trigger events. Events
can be configured and be as simple as playing a note to complex logic controlling when notes play.
NOTE TRIG LOCK TRIGS PARAMETER LOCK SOUND LOCK
Setting a Note Trig activates a Also called trigless lock. Sets This overlays one or more While Parameter Locks allow
note event. Typically this will an event at defined steps in the parameter changes on the parameter changes per step,
play a synth note at a defined pattern that DO NOT trigger selected trig. This allows sound locks allow the actual
velocity and length and is set at audible sounds or notes. They melody variations and creative synth sound preset to be
specific steps in the sequencer do however allow parameter sound design with evolving changed per step.
to create a pattern changes at the trigger point events through a pattern
(Parameter Lock)
Press Press Press & Hold Press & Hold
TRIG key [1] - [16] [FUNC] + TRIG key [1] - [16] TRIG [1]-[16] + (DATA ENTRY) TRIG [1]-[16] + (TRACK LEVEL)
MkII Key lit Red MkII Key is lit Yellow MkII Key Flashes MkII Key Flashes
MkI Trig Led lit bright MkI Trig Led is lit dim MkI Led Flashes MkI Led Flashes
Parameter displayed inverted Display shows sound name
MK II
12 12 12 12
MK I

Pattern Basics 6
NOTES 6.2 Getting Started with Sequencing
Synth sounds are one of the fundamental building blocks from which to
build a sequence. Saved sounds and kits either previously created or
presets will be used in the workflow examples in this section.
Selecting a pattern bank in MkI or MkII follows different workflows.
MkI Bank Selection MK I
Press bank group [BANK GROUP] to toggle between the group A - D and
group E - H. Select one of the four bank buttons under the indicators to
select A/E, B/F, C/G, D/H. The LED indicates red on which which pattern
column and group row is selected. For example Bank A will have top (A - D)
LED illuminated red and the bottom A/E LED Illuminated red.
MkII Bank Selection MK II
Press one of the bank [A] - [H] keys to select the bank. Selected key will
illuminate.

6 Pattern Basics
▌SELECTING A PRESET / SAVED PATTERN NOTES
1. Select a Bank A-H. The trigs will illuminate where patterns exist.
2. Select the desired pattern in the chosen bank by pressing trig [1] to [16].
3. Illuminated key or LED: Dim shows a pattern present in that location,

bright indicates the currently selected pattern.
4. To select a new or to change the pattern within the currently selected

bank; press [BANK] and select trig [1] … [16].
A 4 Second countdown timer to allow pattern to be selected shows on the display after
selecting a bank. Patterns will be named and displayed by Bank Letter and Pattern
Number related to the Trig key. i.e. A06
▌PLAYING A PATTERN
1. Press [PLAY] - key is lit (MkII) and display shows play symbol on the
transport.
▌STOPPING A PATTERN
1. Press [STOP] to stop playback and allow fades of effects.
2. Press [STOP] & [STOP] to stop playback and cut off effects.
3. Display transport will show the stop symbol.
▌PAUSING A PATTERN
1. Press [PLAY] to pause during playback.
2. Press [PLAY] again to continue.
▌TEMPORARY TEMPO SHIFT DURING PLAYBACK
1. During playback press and hold [RIGHT] or [LEFT] to nudge the tempo
up or down by 10%.
2. Releasing the [RIGHT] [LEFT] key will revert to the original set tempo

Pattern Basics 6
NOTES ▌SAVING THE CURRENT PATTERN
1. Select pattern menu: Press [PTN] key on MkII or [FUNC] + [F1] on MkI.
2. Scroll to select the SAVE PATTERN option using [UP][DOWN].
3. Press [YES] to save or [NO] to cancel.
▌QUICK SAVING THE CURRENT PATTERN
1. Press [YES] + [PTN] on the MkII or [YES] + keyboard [F1] on the MkI as
a short cut straight to the SAVE PATTERN function.
▌RELOADING THE ACTIVE PATTERN FROM ORIGINAL SAVED STATE
1. Select pattern menu: press [PTN] Key on the MkII or [FUNC] +

keyboard [F1] on the MkI.
2. Scroll to select the RELOAD PATTERN option using (TRACK LEVEL)

or [UP][DOWN].
3. Press [YES] to reload or [NO] to cancel.
▌QUICK RELOADING OF THE ACTIVE PATTERN
1. Press [NO] + [PTN] on the MkII or [NO] + keyboard [F1] on the MkI as a
short cut straight to the RELOAD PATTERN function.
PATTERN MENU
Reload and Save Menu for Patterns accessed by [PTN]
MkII and [FUNC] + Keyboard [F1] MkI
MK II MK I
Reload can be used creatively during live play by tweaking and

developing evolving patterns and then restoring the original.

6 Pattern Basics
6.3 Copy, Paste and Clear Patterns NOTES
The copy, paste and clear features are available when working with Analog
Four for patterns in normal mode (not in any recording mode).
EXAMPLE:
Copy from current pattern A2 to a new pattern B4
NOT IN RECORDING MODE NOT IN RECORDING MODE
Pattern 2 Pattern 4
Bank A Bank B
Select the current Bank + Pattern Select the current Bank + Pattern
Copy Clear Paste

Press [FUNC] + [REC] Press [FUNC] + [PLAY] Press [FUNC] + [STOP]
COPY CLEAR PASTE
▌COPYING CURRENT PATTERN TO ANOTHER PATTERN SLOT
1. Select the pattern to copy i.e. current pattern, [BANK] + [A] … [H] and
then pattern [1] … [16].
2. Press [FUNC] + [REC] to copy the current pattern when in normal

pattern mode (not record mode as this will copy a track).
3. Select the destination pattern to copy to, [BANK] + [A] … [H] and then
pattern [1] … [16].
4. Press [FUNC] + [STOP] to copy the previously selected pattern to the

newly selected pattern slot.
5. Pressing [FUNC] + [STOP] again will UNDO the previous action.

Pattern Basics 6
NOTES ▌COPYING / PASTING PATTERNS WITHOUT LEAVING THE PATTERN
1. Select the pattern to copy. Hold [PTN] + press TRIG[1] … [16] MkII or
press [BANK] + TRIG[1] … [16] of pattern. Hold the TRIG.
2. While still holding [PTN] or [TRIG], Press [REC] to copy the pattern
3. Select the destination [PTN] or bank + TRIG [1] … [16] to paste into and
keep hold of the TRIG button.
4. Press and hold [STOP] to paste and await the countdown to finish
before releasing all keys.
▌CLEARING CURRENT PATTERN
1. Within the selected pattern, hold [FUNC] + [PLAY].
2. Press [FUNC] + [PLAY] to UNDO clear.
▌CLEARING ONE OR MORE PATTERNS
1. Hold [PTN] MkII or bank [A] - [H] on MkI + Trig or multiple trigs [1] …
[16].
2. While holding [PTN] or TRIGS, press and hold [PLAY] until the timer
completes then release keys. The patterns are cleared.

6 Pattern Basics
6.4 Pattern Change Modes
Patterns can be changed with the sequencer running. The change will be based on the change
mode selected.
▌SETTING PATTERN CHANGE MODE
1. Press [FUNC] + [BANK GROUP] on MkI or [FUNC] + bank [A] - [D] on MkII to toggle across
pattern change modes.
2. Pattern mode key illuminates to show the selected mode. Direct change LED colour reflects
mode on the MkI.
Sequential Direct Start Direct Jump Temp Jump MK II
Default mode. Patterns will New pattern selection will New pattern selections will New pattern changes are
change when the previous start immediately from the start immediately in sync, at firstly armed and then when
pattern has completed its beginning and switch from the same sequence point triggered will jump to play the
sequence. the current playing pattern from where the change took new pattern. When complete
place. the sequence reverts back to
the original sequence or next
Point a pattern change is triggered pattern in the chain.
Original / Current Pattern Original / Current Pattern Original / Current Pattern Original / Current Pattern
New / Change Pattern New / Change Pattern New / Change Pattern New / Change Pattern
MkII Mk II MkII MkII
Sequential LED lit Direct Start LED lit Direct Jump LED lit Led will flash when armed and
light up when temp jump mode
MkI MkI MkI is triggered.
Led will show UNLIT when in Led will light RED when in Led will light GREEN when Temp Jump function is only
sequential mode during direct start mode during in direct jump mode during Available in MkII
pattern mode selection. pattern mode selection. pattern mode selection.

Pattern Basics 6
NOTES ▌CHANGING A PATTERN TO START WHEN CURRENT PATTERN ENDS
1. Press [PLAY] to play the desired pattern.
2. Select SEQUENTIAL pattern change mode by pressing [FUNC] + [A] on

MkII or on the MkI toggle through change modes until direct change
LED is unlit using [FUNC] + [BANK GROUP].
3. Select a new pattern. The new pattern will switch when the currently
active pattern ends.
▌CHANGING A PATTERN IMMEDIATELY
2. Select DIRECT START pattern change mode by pressing [FUNC] + [B]

on MkII or on the MkI toggle through change modes until direct change
LED is lit red using [FUNC] + [BANK GROUP].
3. Select a new pattern. The new pattern will immediately switch to play
from the start.
▌CHANGING A PATTERN IN SYNC WITH CURRENT STEP
2. Select DIRECT JUMP pattern change mode by pressing [FUNC] + [C]

on MkII or on the MkI toggle through change modes until direct change
LED is lit green using [FUNC] + [BANK GROUP].
3. Select a new pattern. The new pattern will immediately switch to play
from the same step, synchronised to the original sequence steps.
▌CHANGING TO A NEW PATTERN TEMPORARILY MK II
2. Arm TEMP JUMP mode by pressing [FUNC] + [D]. LED flashes. MkII
Only.
3. Select a new pattern which will immediately play from the sequenced
step in sync with the original pattern. LED will be lit.
4. When the new pattern ends, the sequence will continue reverting back
to the original pattern.

6 Pattern Basics
NOTES
▌QUICK SETTING THE TOTAL PATTERN LENGTH
1. Press [FUNC] + [PAGE] for the scale page. Select NORMAL mode
using [LEFT] [RIGHT] and then [UP] [DOWN].
2. Press [PAGE] to cycle through page lengths in 16 step increments. If a

pattern exists it will be copied from the previous pages to the next.
3. Changes can also be made in the menu by moving the cursor under the
length parameter (right side number) using [LEFT] [RIGHT] and then
use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN] to change the maximum length.
▌QUICK CHANGE OF A TRACK SPECIFIC PATTERN LENGTH
1. Select [TRACK]
2. Press [FUNC] + [PAGE] to select the Scale Page. Switch to

ADVANCED mode using [LEFT] [RIGHT] and then [UP] [DOWN].
3. Press [PAGE] to cycle through page lengths in 16 step increments. If a

pattern exists it will be copied from the previous pages to the next.
4. Changes can also be made within the scale menu by moving the cursor
to under the length parameter (right side track length number) using
[LEFT] [RIGHT] and then use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP][DOWN] to
change the maximum length.

Pattern Basics 6
NOTES
▌QUICK CHANGE OF PATTERN STEPS
1. Press [FUNC] + [PAGE] to select the scale page.
2. Press trig [1] … [16] to select up to the 16 steps of the current page.
3. Changes can also be made within the scale menu by moving the cursor
to under the length parameter (left number) using [LEFT] [RIGHT] and
then use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN] to change the max length.
▌SETTING TIME SIGNATURE SCALE OF THE PATTERN
1. Press [FUNC] + [PAGE] to select the scale page.
2. Move the cursor to under the time signature parameter (far right side
number) using [LEFT] [RIGHT] and then use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP]
[DOWN] to change the maximum length (multiplied by tempo).
1/8x 1/4x 1/2x 3/4x 1x 3/2x 2x

6 Pattern Basics
6.5 Tempo & Metronome NOTES
Tempo is Analog Four’s global tempo setting applied to all patterns in

project tempo mode, or set for individual patterns in pattern tempo mode.
The tempo range is between 30-300 BPM.
▌DISPLAYING THE TEMPO AND MODE
1. Press [TEMPO] button to select the tempo page and view the current
BPM - Beats Per Minute setting and the mode top left.
▌SWITCHING BETWEEN PROJECT AND PATTERN TEMPO MODES
1. Press [TEMPO] button to select the tempo page and view the current
BPM - Beats Per Minute setting. The word ‘PROJ’ or ‘PTN’ to indicate
the current mode selection as highlighted and colour of TEMPO button
blue or green (MKII).
2. Press [FUNC] + [YES] to toggle between project mode - PROJ or

pattern mode - PTN. Pattern PTN mode is default.
3. Pattern mode will adjust only the selected pattern tempo. Project mode
will adjust the tempo for all patterns in the project.

Pattern Basics 6
NOTES
▌SETTING THE TEMPO
1. Press [TEMPO].
2. Select pattern or project mode with [FUNC] + [YES].
3. Use (TRACK LEVEL) to change tempo in 1 BPM steps. Press + Turn

for larger increments of +/-8 and [UP] [DOWN] to adjust by 0.1 BPM.
4. [TEMPO] Button / LED flashes in time with the selected tempo rate.
▌DELAYED SETTING THE TEMPO
1. Press [TEMPO].
2. Select pattern or project mode with [FUNC] + [YES].
3. Hold [FUNC] + Turn [TRACK LEVEL] to a new tempo. This is not set at
this stage but ‘PREP’ is displayed on the screen.
4. Release [FUNC] at which point the tempo selected is applied.
▌TAPPING A TEMPO
1. Hold [FUNC] + Tap [TEMPO] a minimum of 4 taps.
2. Tempo will adjust to the new tap tempo average.
▌MANUALLY NUDGING TEMPO TEMPORARILY
1. During playback, Press & Hold [LEFT] to reduce tempo by 10%.
2. During playback, Press & Hold [RIGHT] to increase tempo by 10%.
3. Release the [LEFT] or [RIGHT] Key to return to original tempo value.

6 Pattern Basics
NOTES
▌QUICK SELECTION OF METRONOME ON/OFF
1. On MkI, Press & Hold [FUNC] + keyboard [A1] ’Click’ for 1 Second to
toggle ‘Click ON’. Repeat to toggle OFF.
2. On MkII, Press & Hold [FUNC] + [TRK] ‘Metronome’ for 1 Second to

toggle ‘Click ON’. Repeat to toggle OFF.
▌SETTING A CLICK TRACK
1. Press [FUNC] + Keyboard [A1] ‘Click’.
2. Use [UP] or [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to navigate to selection.
3. Use [LEFT] or [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the selected

setting.
4. Options are;
• ACTIVE: Sets click On - Checked or OFF.
• TIME SIG NUMerator setting i.e. 4/4 (note measure).
• TIME SIG DENominator setting i.e. 4/4 (beat measure).
• PREROLL: Sets LIVE RECORDING mode count in i.e. the number of

bars that the metronome sounds before the sequence starts.
• VOLUME of the metronome click.

Pattern Basics 6
6.6 Length and Timing
Analog Four has a maximum of 64 steps mapped over 4 pages, each containing 16 steps. The
steps are essentially set by trigs using the 16 trig keys, one for each step. A pattern per synth, FX
and CV track. Extending pattern lengths also copies the existing pattern to the new page.
Page 1:4 Page 2:4 Page 3:4 Page 4:4

1 16 32 48 64
Trk 1
Trk 2
Trk 3
Trk 4
FX
CV
Orange Lit Flash Orange Dark / Unlit Dark / Unlit

page contains a pattern Pattern page being played. no pattern on this page no pattern on this page
Bright - Pattern page selected.
MK II 1:4 2:4 3:4 4:4
[FUNC] + [PAGE] + [PAGE]
Selects the Scale options and Within the scale options page, cycles
settings screen through and selects the active page of
the available pages
Outside of the scale options page,

selects the length in 16 step blocks
MK I
Pages can be copied using the [PAGE] + [REC] key commands, pasted using [PAGE]+ [STOP]
and cleared with [PAGE] + [ PLAY] in grid recording mode

6 Pattern Basics
Analog Four length and timing is set in the scale menu accessed by the [FUNC] + [PAGE]
command. There are two modes available. Normal mode sets all the tracks with the same settings.
Advanced mode enables tracks to be individually set up. Within the SCALE menu.
NORMAL
MODE PATTERN
MODE
Highlight the mode using cursor NORM.
and then [UP] [DOWN] to switch
between Advanced and Normal.
ADV.
SELECTION CURSOR
Shows active element for
editing. Use [LEFT][RIGHT] to
move cursor
STEPS MAXIMUM TIME SIGNATURE
Sets the number of Sets the maximum number Sets the scale as a
steps in the pattern of steps available in multiplier of pattern tempo
increments of 16
ADVANCED
TRACK
Track currently selected for
track dependant length
MODE TRACK 1 MASTER

MODE
Highlight the mode using
cursor and then [UP] [DOWN] NORM. LEN CHNG
to switch between Advanced
and Normal. ADV.
SELECTION CURSOR
Shows active element for
editing. Use [LEFT][RIGHT]
to move cursor PATTERN STEP LENGTH
TOTAL CHANGE
Total Steps played before all How long the pattern is played before
tracks or a chain restarts. a cued or chained pattern starts
INF : Patterns loop infinitely
Use [UP] or [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to change parameters. Use [FUNC] + [UP] [DOWN] to change Len in 16 step
increments. Patterns are copied over when the length is extended over multiple pages

Pattern Basics 6
6.7 Creating a Basic Pattern Using Note Trigs
Analog Four has many powerful features that combine to create a pattern. Trig buttons / keys are
used for multiple functions. In this illustration they are used in their primary role to set and trigger
notes within patterns. The basic set up will require the arrangement of steps within grid or live
recording mode and setting trigs to activate notes and associated parameters. This section
concentrates on the initial process of building arrangements with note trigs.
OVERVIEW OF NOTE TRIGS
MK I MK II
NOTE TRIG
NOTE NOTE
Parameters Parameters
An event set at a defined step
Note, Velocity, in the sequencer that triggers Note, Velocity,
Length, note information and that, Length,
Condition etc combined with others, is Condition etc
arranged to form a pattern
Active note trigs are indicated by Active note trigs are indicated
the led lit red over the Trig keys. note lit red on the Trig keys. Unlit
Unlit keys contain no trigs keys contain no trigs
1 16
Trk 1
An event can trigger either a synth sound

within Tracks 1-4 or FX and CV events.
Also optionally output note on/off and
velocity to MIDI.

6 Pattern Basics
RECORDING MODES NOTES
Three programming modes for creating patterns are available. The first mode is
grid recording mode. Grid Recording mode allows steps to be manually selected
at locations throughout the sequence. Trig selections are at a default fixed
velocity of 100.
GRID RECORDING
• Select using [REC].
• [REC] button illuminates red on MkII and LED illuminates red on MkI.
• Grid recording is activated from within live recording mode by

pressing [REC].
• Manually press trig keys to select the desired steps to set the pattern
trigs at the required location.
• Press a keyboard note and trig to set chromatic notes per trig.
• Ideal for fixed step patterns such as kick and snare.
• Preview steps with [TRIG] + [YES].
MK II
[REC] to Activate
GRID RECORDING
MK I
Manually set the trig steps

at the desired step
MK II
MK I

Pattern Basics 6
NOTES RECORDING MODES
The second recording mode is live recording. Live recording mode enables tracks
to be played live individually or chromatically and the naturally played note is
positioning as recorded. Trig selections are at a default fixed velocity of 100.
LIVE RECORDING
• Select by holding [REC] then press [PLAY]
• [REC] button flashes red per beat and [PLAY] is green MkII and the
LED Flashes on MkI
• Play live / real time to set trig steps.
• Notes can be played in chromatic mode
• Pressing [REC] in live recording will switch to GRID RECORDING.

Play will continue.
• Pressing [PLAY] will exit live recording and pattern will continue to play.
• [STOP] to exit live recording and stop playback.
MK II
[REC] + [PLAY] to Activate

LIVE RECORDING
MK I
Use the A4 or an external midi

keyboard to play notes in real time
MK II
MK I

6 Pattern Basics
RECORDING MODES NOTES
The third recording mode is step recording. Step recording mode automates the
adding of steps into a static sequence. Two modes exist within step recording
mode, standard & jump. Trig selections are at a default fixed velocity of 100.
STEP RECORDING
• Select by holding [REC] then press [STOP].
• [REC] button will double flashes red in step recording mode.
• Manually select the desired steps to set pattern trigs at the

required location.
• The sequence step position will automatically advance to the

next step.
• Standard and Jump (LEN determines length) sub modes. Toggle

sub-modes with [REC] + [STOP] + [STOP].
• Notes can be played with the internal or external keyboard.
• [REC] to exit step recording and stop playback.
• Preview steps with [TRIG] + [YES].
MK II
[REC] + [STOP] to Activate

STEP RECORDING
MK I
Use the A4 or an external midi

keyboard to record step notes
MK II
MK I

Pattern Basics 6
NOTES ▌COMPOSING A BASIC PATTERN IN GRID MODE
1. Select the track in which to create a pattern e.g. Track 1 Synth.
2. Set the pattern length using [PAGE] options and the page to edit.
3. Enter GRID RECORDING Mode by pressing the [REC] transport button.

The REC key on MkII or LED on MKI lights red and the record symbol ●
is displayed on the main display.
4. Select the steps to trigger by pressing the [TRIG] buttons for the desired
NOTE TRIG step positions. Pressing a keyboard note first or as well as
a TRIG will add note trigs based on the note selected. Each trig key or
its associated led lights fully for the trig steps selected.
5. Play the sequence using [PLAY] to hear the pattern played.
▌ADDING TRIG NOTES IN LIVE RECORDING MODE
1. Select the synth or CV track to add a melody or sounds for a pattern.
2. Press [REC] + [PLAY] buttons.
3. The Sequence plays and is set to record. The main display shows the
Rec ● and Play ► symbols and the REC LED in MkI and REC Key on
MkII Flashes in time with sequence.
4. Play the keyboard notes ie externally connected MIDI keyboard in real

time to record notes into the steps in real time as the sequence plays.
5. Press [REC] to switch from LIVE RECORDING to GRID RECORDING

while play continues.
6. Press [PLAY] to switch out of recording mode to PLAY from LIVE

RECORDING mode.
7. Press [STOP] to stop recording and playback.
▌ERASING TRIG NOTES IN LIVE RECORDING MODE
1. To erase notes in realtime (sequence playing) press the track button to

erase [Trk] + [NO]. The trig steps triggered during the sequence will be
deleted. The synth track buttons; Trk 1- Trk 4 MkI and T1-T4 for MkII.
2. Select multiple tracks in order to erase more than one track at the same
time eg [Trk 1], [Trk 2] + [NO].

6 Pattern Basics
NOTES
▌CHANGE / CHECK STEP RECORDING MODE STATE
1. Select Track to record by Selecting Trig [1] ...[4] or a FX or CV Track.
2. Select STEP RECORDING mode by pressing [REC] + [STOP]. The

REC Key will flash double red to indicate step recording mode is active.
3. Hold [REC] + [STOP], [STOP] - i.e. stop twice while Rec is held to
switch between standard and jump .
4. Display indicates mode state selected.
▌STEP RECORDING IN STANDARD MODE

REC Key will double flash red to indicate step recording mode is active.
3. Ensure step recording state is set to ‘standard’ mode.
4. Select a start point trig step. The blinking trig key will indicate the
currently selected step.
5. Also use the [LEFT], [RIGHT] to relocate the step position.
6. [NOTE] Page sets the note length LEN and velocity VEL.
7. Notes can then be played chromatically on the internal or a connected

external keyboard. To transpose, use [UP] or [DOWN] MKI or [OCT+] or
[OCT-] MKII.
8. Press [REC] to exit step recording mode.
▌ADDING PARAMETER LOCKS DURING STEP RECORDING.
Parameter locks are automatically created when recording for the NOTE
and length LEN trig parameters in step recording mode.
1. In step recording mode.
2. To add a parameter lock, hold trig [1] … [16] + turn the control for the
parameter to adjust and lock into the trig.
3. Parameter will invert on the display.

Pattern Basics 6
NOTES
▌STEP RECORDING IN JUMP MODE

REC Key will double flash red to indicate step recording mode is active.
3. Ensure step recording state is set to ‘jump’ mode.
4. Select a trig start step. The blinking trig key will indicate the currently
selected step.
5. Use also the [LEFT] or [RIGHT] to relocate the step position.
6. Select the [NOTE] Page and set the LEN Parameter - Control (C). In
jump mode this length setting will determine:
• The length of the step note i.e. 1/16th.
• The step advancement of the sequencer i.e. 1/16th.
• Will parameter lock LEN on the step.
7. Notes can then be played chromatically on the internal or external

keyboard (using auto channel). To transpose, use [UP] or [DOWN] MKI
or [OCT+] or [OCT-] MKII..
• Play the notes to add into the pattern. The notes are added and the
sequence position will automatically advance forward.
• Multiple notes can be added to a step by holding a keyboard note
and pressing another (must be configured for polyphony).
• External keyboard will record velocity. Unless holding [FUNC] +

notes which then uses the VEL parameter setting.
• Also hold [YES] while placing a trig to insert a length as per the
duration of the held trig.
• Press [NO] to remove a note trig or add a rest into a step.
• Existing parameter locks when placing a new note step will remain.
8. In step recording mode pressing [PLAY] and [STOP] operates normally

while within this mode allowing step recording while playing.
9. Press [REC] to exit step recording mode.

6 Pattern Basics
6.8 Shifting, Copy, Paste and Clear Trigs NOTES
The copy, paste and clear features are available when working in the
sequencer for trigs and their parameter locks in GRID RECORDING mode.
EXAMPLE:
Copy from Trig Step 1 and Paste to Step 13, Clear Trig 9
GRID RECORDING MODE
copies trigs including parameter locks
COPY / PASTE
TRIG
Copy Paste
Hold Trig [1] + [REC]
1 13 Hold Trig [13] + [STOP]
Track 1
1 13
Clear Locks
Hold Trig [9] + [PLAY]
9
Simply press the Trig to clear the step
CLEAR
▌COPYING ONE TRIG TO ANOTHER STEP LOCATION
1. Select GRID RECORDING Mode, press [REC].
2. Press and hold the source TRIG [1] … [16] to copy and press [REC].
This copies the trig and settings.
3. Press and hold the destination TRIG [1] … [16] and press [STOP]. This
pastes the previously copied trig into the destination.

Pattern Basics 6
NOTES ▌COPYING MULTIPLE TRIGS TO OTHER STEP LOCATIONS
1. Select GRID RECORDING Mode, Press [REC].
2. Select and hold all of the source TRIG [1] … [16] to copy and press
[REC]. This copies all the trigs that have been held with the first trig as
reference.
3. Hold a destination TRIG [1] … [16] and press [STOP]. This paste’s the
previous trigs into the destination in the same step format and order
referencing the first step.
▌CLEARING ONE TRIG LOCK
1. Select GRID RECORDING Mode, Press [REC].
2. Select and hold the selected TRIG [1] … [16] to clear and press [PLAY].
This clears the selected trig locks.
3. A note trig step is removed by simply pressing the TRIG.
▌CLEARING MULTIPLE TRIG LOCKS
1. Select GRID RECORDING Mode, Press [REC]
2. Select and hold the selected multiple TRIGS [1] … [16] to clear and
press [PLAY]. This clears the selected trig locks.
▌SHIFTING PATTERN STEPS
1. Select or ensure setting is GRID RECORDING MODE.
2. Press [FUNC] + [RIGHT] to move all TRIGS, 1 step forward / later.
3. Press [FUNC] + [LEFT] to move all TRIGS, 1 step back / earlier.
4. Press [TRIG] + [LEFT] or [RIGHT] to micro shift steps in smaller

increments.
[FUNC] + [RIGHT] Track 2
Track 2
[FUNC] + [LEFT] Track 2

NOTES

7
Patterns Advanced
Having covered the basics of pattern creation, rule sets. Parameter locks enable parameter
this section provides a deeper dive into the variations for each step and sound locks allow
features and parameters that unlock the full individual unique sounds assigned per step. A
power of sequencing within Analog Four. If the temporary save and reload function opens up
Analog Four basic sequencing is like a high some create opportunities especially when
performance car, then this section kicks in the playing live. As a general point of note, when
turbo boost. Sound creation has been covered navigating the pattern and other menu’s the
so understanding the full power of patterns and location in the menu structure will remain at the
sequencing will also help when developing your previous position. The instructions therefore start
workflows towards sound design and music at the top menu. If needed, press [NO] from
creation. The key pages when working with within the menu repeatedly to take the location
patterns are the [NOTE] page and TRACK back to the highest entry level in the menu
menu and these are therefore given close structure. Now here’s where the real fun starts!
attention within this section. The arpeggiator
[ARP] is also covered here. While the assembly
of a series of steps and trigs into an
arrangement builds melodic patterns, the
patterns plus the parameter variations are at
the heart of Analog Four. The sequencer is
enhanced by complex functions such as trig
conditions, where patterns are governed by

7 Patterns Advanced
7.1 Note Page Parameters
The note page shows the fundamental note trig settings which are stored within the pattern. The
parameters are applicable to the currently selected track. The settings will be applied when setting
trigs. Parameter locks allow setting a parameter that is individual to that specific trig.
SYNTH TRACKS 1-4
A NOT F ENV
Sets the pitch of the selected trig note. Overridden Sets whether ENVF should retrigger the trigger step
by Live Recording - Chromatic notes. C0 - G10. (Note Trig or Trig Lock)
B VEL G ENV
Sets the velocity of the trig note. Trig keys are not Sets whether ENV2 should retrigger the trigger step
velocity sensitive. Also affects VELOCITY MOD (Note Trig or Trig Lock)
Parameter. 0-127 - Default 100
C LEN H LFO
Sets the length of the selected trig. Live Recording Sets whether LFO1 should retrigger the trigger step
overrides LEN parameter. 0.125 -128,INF. Use (Note Trig or Trig Lock)
[FUNC] + (C) for stepped selection of parameters.
D uTM I LFO
Micro timing places notes slightly before or after the Sets whether LFO2 should retrigger the trigger step
quantized position in 1/384 increments. (Note Trig or Trig Lock)
E PRB (Also TRC when condition is set)

J Not Used
Trig probability on whether the trig plays (100% =
always) or not (0%-99%), evaluated at each trig No Parameter for Date Entry J
iteration. Overridden by any set condition (TRC).
The current value of each parameter is displayed when the control is adjusted or all parameter setting can be displayed by holding
TRIG [1] - [16] key within the NOTE page. Press selected TRIG [1] - [16] + Press (DATA ENTRY) to reset the single parameter or press
(DATA ENTRY) + (NO) in Live Recording mode to reset. Copy [TRIG] + [REC] and Paste [TRIG] + [STOP] also operate within and
across the NOTE pages.

Patterns Advanced 7
NOTES Micro Timing - uTM
Micro timing is adjusted using uTM DATA ENTRY (D), in the NOTE page or by pressing and
holding TRIG [1] … [16] + [LEFT] or [RIGHT] where the micro timing adjustment page will be
visible. [FUNC] + [NOTE] Accesses the set up menu.
MICRO TIMING
-23 +23
On Grid
Negative Values Zero Position Positive Values
Places trigs earlier than Quantised position ‘on Places trigs later than
the quantized position to grid’ when set to zero the quantized position
play prematurely delaying the note.
+/-
1/384 1/192 1/96 5/384 1/64 7/384 1/48 1/96 3/128
5/192 11/384 1/32 13/384 7/192 5/128 1/24 17/384
3/64 19/384 5/96 7/128 11/192 23/384
Setup in the NOTE Menu

Micro Timing settings are stored with the active pattern

7 Patterns Advanced
7.2 Note Setup Parameters NOTES
Additional note set up parameters including the option to send notes out
through MIDI are configured in the notes setup menu.
▌ACCESSING NOTE SETUP MENU
1. Press [FUNC] + [NOTE] to open the setup menu. Alternatively the note
setup option can be found in the [TRK] Menu on MkII and [FUNC] +
keyboard [E] - track, on the MkI version.
GLOBAL QUANTIZE - All Tracks QUANTIZE - Selected Track
Sets the amount that the ALL of the micro timed Sets the amount that the ACTIVE TRACK micro
trigs will be quantized towards the on grid timed trigs will be quantized towards the on grid
position. The higher the number the greater the position. The higher the number the greater the
quantization quantization
KEY SCALE - Selected Track KEY NOTE - Selected Track
Sets the active track key scale and adjusts all Sets the key note of the track and also will be the
notes to the selected scale. Is non destructive reference for transposition of the track offset from
and is also affected by the transpose function. key note
TRANSPOSABLE - Selected Track
Selects whether or not the track can be transposed. Also as a quick change command use
[TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII + Track [1] - [6]
MK I MK II
+ +
SEND MIDI - Selected Track
Selects whether or not the track will send MIDI Note on/off data and velocity from the selected track
sequencer. This is in addition to the track triggering the trigs and notes on the Analog Four

Patterns Advanced 7
NOTES 7.3 Parameter Locks, Lock Trigs and Sound Locks
Parameter locks allow individual note or associated parameters per trig.
These are found under the TRC (E) control function. This is normally the
PRB Probability function and becomes visible in recording mode when
holding a trig button. Lock trigs also called trigless locks only assign a
parameter change with no note triggered. Sound locks allow the setting of
individual sounds per trig.
▌SETTING A SPECIFIC PARAMETER LOCK
1. Select GRID RECORDING Mode.
2. Press & Hold the Trig to set the parameter lock [1] … [16]. The PRB
Probability option changes to TRC Condition.
3. Adjust the selected parameter to the setting for the specific trig step.
Trig key will flash and the parameter will show inverted on the screen.
▌CLEARING A PARAMETER LOCK
2. Press & Hold the trig to clear [1] … [16] + Press (DATA ENTRY) control
of the parameter to clear.
▌SETTING A SERIES OF PARAMETER LOCKS LIVE
1. Select LIVE RECORDING Mode.
2. Adjust the selected parameter (DATA ENTRY) control to record

parameter changes across trigs being played. Trigs key will flash and
the parameter will show inverted on the screen.
▌CLEARING A PARAMETER LOCK IN LIVE RECORDING
2. Press & Hold the [FUNC] + [NO] to clear trig parameter locks. This does
not apply to the NOTES page parameters.

7 Patterns Advanced
NOTES
▌CLEARING A SINGLE PARAMETER LOCK LIVE
2. Press [NO] + Press (DATA ENTRY) of the parameter to clear.
▌SETTING A NOTE LOCK
1. Select desired track / pattern.
3. Press TRIG [1] … [16] + KEYBOARD Note.
▌SETTING A TRIG LOCK
1. Select desired track / pattern.
3. Press [FUNC] + the TRIG to set the trig lock [1] … [16] to toggle on off.
4. Trig will show lit dim.
▌SETTING A SPECIFIC SOUND LOCK
1. Select desired track.
3. Press & Hold the trig to set the sound lock [1] … [16].
4. Adjust (TRACK LEVEL) which will open and scroll through the sound
pool browser.
5. Trig will flash when a sound lock is present on MkI.
▌CHECKING ASSIGNED SOUND LOCK
1. Press & Hold Trig [1] … [16].
2. Display will show assigned sound if a sound lock is present.

Patterns Advanced 7
OVERVIEW OF PARAMETER & SOUND LOCKS
PARAMETERS
Adjust Parameter(s) for the settings that are required at the
specific held Trig. For example a Note change. Up to 128
MK I Parameters per pattern can be locked. MK II
PARAMETER LOCK

+ in the sequencer that is +
triggered with a unique
parameter setting for the
specific trig step
SOUND LOCK
in the sequencer that is
triggered with a unique sound
for the specific trig step
Sound Sound
X Y
1 16
Trk 1
Note Filter
F Change
Example: All steps by default trigger Note

Example: Assign a filter change parameter
‘C’ and specific Trigs Set to ‘F’.
lock to one or more step trigs.
Press TRIG + KEYBOARD Note.

7 Patterns Advanced
7.4 Trig Mute & Fill Mode NOTES
Trig steps can be individually muted by setting a trig mute. Fills can
be setup as part of conditional locks. both can help create variations.
▌SETTING A TRIG MUTE
1. Within the active track, Select GRID RECORDING Mode.
2. Press [FUNC] + BANK [A/E] MkI or [FUNC] + BANK [E] MkII to select
the trig mute mode - display indicates.
3. While in the Trig Mute mode, Press / Select Trigs [1] … [16] to be muted
4. Trig illuminates green when muted in trig mute edit mode.
▌QUICK SETTING A TRIG MUTE
1. Press and Hold a Trig [1] … [16] + Press BANK [A/E] MkI or [FUNC] +
BANK [E] MkII to mute the selected Trig.
2. To check which trigs contain a mute, Press & Hold Trig [1] … [16].
BANK [A/E] LED lit MkI or BANK [E] LED lit MkII shows trig has a mute.

Patterns Advanced 7
NOTES .
▌SETTING UP A FILL WITHIN A PATTERN
Set the event within the trig. For example, this could be simply be the
note being triggered.
1. Select the [NOTE] Page.
2. Press and Hold the target TRIG [1] … [16].
3. Set up TRC = FILL for the held trig by adjusting TRC (E).
4. Press [PAGE] MkI or [FILL] MkII while playing to trigger the temporary
fill condition. Must be in PLAY and not in GRID RECORDING Mode.
• Also fill can be activated for one cycle using [YES] + [PAGE] MkI or
[FUNC] + [FILL] MkII.
• Latch FILL by pressing [PAGE] + [YES] then release [PAGE] first,

before releasing [YES]. Press [PAGE] to unlatch on MkI.
• Latch FILL by pressing [FILL] + [YES] then release [FILL] first

before releasing [YES]. Press [FILL] to unlatch on MkII.

7 Patterns Advanced
7.5 Conditional Trig Locks and Note Probability
Conditional locks are set just like parameter locks and apply a set of defined rules to the selected
trig step that must be fulfilled to enable the trig step to be triggered. Conditional trigs offer a great
way to develop complex and evolving patterns especially in combination. Conditional trigs are set up
in the NOTE menu with parameter TRC (E). TRIG [1]...[16] + Press (E) to remove TRC Condition.
NOTE Page
ADD CONDITIONAL LOCK

Press Trig + Turn TRC (E) to apply the + E
options available for conditional trig locks.
REMOVE CONDITIONAL LOCK

Press Trig + Press TRC (E) to remove the + E
conditional trig lock.

Patterns Advanced 7
Conditional Locks / Trig Conditions Explained
Conditional trigs offer a great way to develop complex and evolving patterns set with parameter
locks which apply a set of rules to the trig step. These predefined rules must be fulfilled to enable
the trig step to operate. This mode is available from the TRC option.
The rules for trig conditions are set using parameter locks. A trig needs to be set first for the chosen
rule to act upon. The condition rule set will determines how the trig behaves in the pattern
sequence.
FILL
FILL FILL
Applies a fill on the chosen trig step and A fill is applied on the chosen trig step but
fill is then triggered when the fill mode is does NOT apply the fill during the fill
activated. mode being activated.
FILL MODE
Fill mode is a function that temporarily adds fills and variations such as pitch change or retrigger.
This creates more interest in a pattern or at pattern change / cycle end. Fill mode is pre-requisite in
the use of the Fill trig conditions. Fill mode would need to also be set on the same step such as the
fill condition and would then be triggered by:-
• Manually pressing [FILL] MkII or [PAGE] MkI key during pattern playback (not available in grid
recording mode)
• A one pattern cycle during pattern playback. Set by pressing [YES] + [PAGE] MkI or [FUNC] +
[FILL] MkII to cue a fill (not available in grid recording mode).
• Latch fill mode ON: MkI, use [PAGE] + [YES] then release [PAGE] first followed by [YES]. Press
[PAGE] to unlatch. MkII, use [FILL] + [YES] then release [FILL] first followed by [YES] to unlatch.
FILL FILL
Only triggers when Triggers when FILL
FILL mode is active mode is NOT active
1 16
Track 1
As well COND being set to FILL the step would also need a fill setting such as a retrigger to generate a
drum roll and then this would only trigger when FILL is activated manually, one cycle or on latch.

7 Patterns Advanced
NOTES
▌SETTING UP A FILL
1. Set a TRIG in a pattern where a fill is needed
2. Set the action within the trig that would be triggered. For example, this
could be simply be a note or sample being triggered or something more
elaborate such as a retrig to create a roll.
3. Select the [TRIG] Page.
4. Hold the Target Trig [1] … [16].
5. Set up COND = FILL on the target trig by adjusting (C) Audio track or
(G) Midi track trig.
6. [PLAY] to play the pattern and ensure not in GRID RECORDING Mode.
7. Press [PAGE] while playing to trigger the fill condition on the selected
trig. Also fill can be activated for one cycle using [YES] + [PAGE] or
latch fill by pressing [PAGE] + [YES] then release [PAGE] first. [PAGE]
to unlatch.

Patterns Advanced 7
NOTES
PRE
PRE
Applies the trigger on the chosen step when a

previous, most recent trig event condition on the same
track is triggered. Will not trigger if the prior condition is
‘false’ i.e. inactive.
PRE
Does NOT apply a trigger on the chosen step when a

previous, most recent trig condition event on same track
is triggered. Equally this trig will operate if the previous,
most recent trig condition prior is not ‘true’ i.e. active.
PRE
Triggers when a previous trig
condition, same track has
been triggered.
Track 2
PRE
Does NOT trigger when a
previous trig condition, same
track has been triggered.
PRE Conditions are dependant on the most recent trig conditions on the same track prior
to the trig on which it is placed.

7 Patterns Advanced
NOTES
NEI
NEI
Applies the trigger on the chosen step when a previous

trig condition on the neighbouring (one prior) track is
triggered. Will not trigger if the prior track condition is
‘false’ i.e. inactive.
NEI
Does NOT apply a trigger on the chosen step when a

trig condition on the neighbouring (one prior) track is
triggered. Equally this trig will operate if the previous,
most recent trig condition prior track is not ‘true’ i.e.
active.
1 16
Track 1
Track 2
NEI
condition, neighbouring track is
active / has been triggered
NEI
condition, neighbouring track is
not triggered / inactive.
NEI Conditions are dependant on the most recent trig conditions on the previous
neighbouring track prior to the trig on which it is placed.

Patterns Advanced 7
NOTES
1ST
1ST
Applies the trigger on the chosen step when the

pattern plays its first loop. Will not trigger on
subsequent pattern cycles.
1ST
Applies the trigger on the chosen step when the

pattern plays on any loop cycle except the first loop.
Will not trigger on the first loop of a pattern cycle.
Track 2
1ST
Will trigger on the 1st pass
only of the loop cycle
PATTERN LOOP 1
1ST
PATTERN LOOP 2 Will trigger on the all loop
cycles except the first loop.
Count Reset
PATTERN LOOP 3
PATTERN LOOP 4
1ST Conditions are dependant on the loop cycles.

7 Patterns Advanced
NOTES
A:B
A:B
Sets the cycles looped before triggering and the total

cycles played before the cycle counter resets.
Track 2
2:4
Will trigger on the 2nd cycle
of a 4 cycle loop count and
reset at the end of 4th cycle.
PATTERN LOOP 1
A
Is the number of loop within the
PATTERN LOOP 2
cycles before the trigger is active. In
this example 2.
Count Reset
PATTERN LOOP 3
B
PATTERN LOOP 4 Is the number of loop cycles before
the count resets. In this example 4.
1:2 2:4 3:4

Trigger is active on first loop, Trigger is active on second loop, Trigger is active on third loop,
then third, fifth of new cycles etc. then fourth, sixth on next cycle then sixth, ninth of new cycles
The loop count is every second etc. Loop count is end of fourth etc. The loop count is every
loop. loop. fourth loop.
1ST Conditions are dependant on the loop cycles and the condition initiates a trigger and
also a reset of the counter.

Patterns Advanced 7
NOTES
X%
X%
Applies the probability of a trigger playing on the

chosen step when the pattern plays. Will always trigger
at 100% and never at 0%.
100% 25%
Default probability meaning Step has a 1 in 4 chance
triggers normally each cycle each cycle of triggering.
1 16
Track 1
0% 66%
Step will not trigger on any Step has approximately a 2 out of
pattern cycle 3 chance each cycle of triggering.
X% Conditions are dependant on the ‘chance’ of a trig activating. This is similar to a

random (within the % constraints) setting. This TRC conditional probability setting takes
precedence over the main PRB probability. These are different settings.

7 Patterns Advanced
7.6 Swing, Accents and Slide NOTES
A number of features add to the operation of trigs and notes to add more
creativity to patterns.
▌SETTING PATTERN SWING
1. Select [FUNC] + [PTN] on MkII or [FUNC] + keyboard [B1] on MkI.
2. Use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN] to change the setting.
3. Setting is between 50% - 80% as indicated in the display with 50%

being the default ‘no swing’ setting.
▌SETTING A TRIG ACCENT
An accent changes the emphasis of the trig by increasing the volume and
ENVF DEP Parameter behaviour to accentuate the trig note when played
1. Select track.
2. Open the ACCENT menu [FUNC] + bank [F] on MkII or [FUNC] + bank
[B/F] on MkI.
3. Select the level of the accentuation using (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP]

[DOWN].
4. Select TRIG’ which are to be accented at the selected level. On MKII

Accented TRIGs will be shown brightly lit pink while in the accent menu.
5. Close the ACCENT Menu [FUNC] + bank [F] on MkII or [FUNC] + bank
[B/F] on MkI or press [NO].
▌QUICK SETTING OF A TRIG ACCENT
1. Press and Hold TRIG + bank [F] MkII or bank [B/F] to quickly set an
accent at the current level on the selected TRIG.
▌QUICK CHECK FOR A TRIG ACCENT STATUS
1. Tap TRIG. If bank [F] MkII or bank [B/F] lights then this indicates an
accent is present on the selected TRIG.

Patterns Advanced 7
NOTES
▌CLEARING TRACK ACCENT
1. Select track.
2. Open the ACCENT Menu [FUNC] + bank [F] on MkII or [FUNC] + bank
[B/F] on MkI.
3. Press [FUNC] + [PLAY] to clear accent.
4. Exit the ACCENT Menu [FUNC] + bank [F] on MkII or [FUNC] + bank
[B/F] on MkI or press [NO].
▌SETTING A NOTE SLIDE
A note slide enables the pitch transition (slide) between two notes trigs
1. Select track.
2. Open the NOTE SLIDE Mode [FUNC] + bank [G] on MkII or [FUNC] +
bank [C/G] on MkI.
3. Select TRIG to locate a SLIDE command. On MKII Slide TRIGs will be

shown yellow while in the slide menu.
SLIDE Example
With TRIG 10 set to ‘Slide’ the note pitch will

10 slide from the pitch on the prior TRIG i.e.
step 1 to the pitch for note on step 10.
Track 1
1 10
OSC2 Page 2 - SLI Parameter

sets the slide speed
Parameter slides set the slide between two settings

7 Patterns Advanced
▌QUICK SETTING OF A TRIG SLIDE NOTES
1. Press and Hold TRIG + bank [G] MkII or bank [C/G] to quickly set an
slide on the selected TRIG.
▌QUICK CHECK FOR A TRIG SLIDE STATUS
1. Tap TRIG. If bank [G] MkII or bank [C/G] lights then this indicates an
slide is present on the selected TRIG.
▌CLEARING TRACK NOTE SLIDES
1. Open the NOTE SLIDE Menu [FUNC] + bank [G] on MkII or [FUNC] +
bank [C/G] on MkI.
2. Press [FUNC] + [PLAY] to clear slides.
3. Exit the NOTE SLIDE Menu [FUNC] + bank [G] on MkII or [FUNC] +
bank [C/G] on MkI or press [NO].
▌SETTING A PARAMETER SLIDE
1. Open the PARAMETER SLIDE Menu [FUNC] + bank [H] on MkII or

[FUNC] + bank [D/H] on MkI.
2. Select TRIG to locate a SLIDE command. TRIG must have the specific
parameter locked for it to operate. On MKII Param slide TRIGs will be
shown blue while in the slide menu.
▌QUICK SETTING OF A PARAMETER SLIDE
1. Press and Hold TRIG + bank [H] MkII or bank [D/H] to quickly set an
slide on the selected TRIG.
▌QUICK CHECK FOR A PARAMETER SLIDE STATUS
1. Tap TRIG. If bank [H] MkII or bank [D/H] lights then this indicates an
slide is present on the selected TRIG.

Patterns Advanced 7
NOTES 7.7 Transpose
Tracks can be transposed up or down.
ADJUST NOTE SET OCTAVE

Transpose by note Adjust octave range to
[KEYBOARD] be transposed
[UP]
MK I +
Note Menu
TRACK KEY NOTE
TRACK KEY SCALE
Also affect transposition settings
MK II +
ADJUST NOTE SET OCTAVE

Transpose by note Adjust octave range to
[KEYBOARD] be transposed
[DOWN]
▌TRANSPOSING A TRACK
1. Select and play a track
2. Ensure that the track can be transposed. This is set in the note setup
menu or hold [TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII + Track [1]...[6] to
quickly enable transpose.
3. Press & Hold [TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII + KEYBOARD note.
4. Press & Hold [TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII + [UP] [DOWN] to

shift octave range ready to be transposed.
5. Display pop-up will show transpose status when pressing

[TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII.
6. [FUNC] + [TRNS] or [TRANSPOSE] will lock transposition mode for one

handed operation.

7 Patterns Advanced
NOTES
▌TRANSPOSING A TRACK & FIXING PERMANENTLY
1. Transpose the track through the normal process.
2. Press [TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII + [YES] to permanently fix

the transpose offset.
▌DESTRUCTIVE (PERMANENTLY) TRANSPOSING OF A TRACK
1. Select track and ensure that the track can be transposed. This is set in
the note setup menu or hold [TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII + track
[1]...[6] to quickly enable transpose.
2. Press & Hold [TRACK] + [UP] [DOWN] to transpose trigs.
▌CHECKING A TRANSPOSE STATUS
1. Press [TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII to view tracks that are

transposable (these show with a lit led on the track).
▌LOCKING TRANSPOSE OPTION STATUS
1. Press [FUNC] + [TRANSPOSE] MkI or [TRNS] MkII to lock transpose

mode on.
2. Transpose indicator stays lit bright.
3. Single handed key presses of the KEYBOARD notes will allow

transposition changes. Keyboard is only used to transpose in this mode.
▌CLEARING THE TRANSPOSITION
1. Press [TRNS] MkII or [TRANSPOSE] MkI + [PLAY] to clear.
▌TRANSPOSING THE KEYBOARD
1. Press [OCT+] or [OCT-] on the MkII to shift the keyboard octave up or

down. Use [UP] [DOWN] on MkI.
2. Keyboard LED’s indicate keyboard octave status.

Patterns Advanced 7
7.8 Arpeggiator
The Analog Four contains an arpeggiator to provide even more sequencing capability. There is one
arpeggiator per track i.e. 6 in total and the settings are saved with the pattern.
TRACKS 1-6
LEN Arp Length

16 Data Entry
+ (E)
[NO] to exit arp setup screen

ARP T1
Arpeggiator setup menu
A MOD F NO2
Switches the arpeggiator on/off and sets the mode Offset in semitones from original note of the second
which controls the arpeggiator notes arpeggiators note.
B SPD G NO3
Speed of the arpeggiator with respect to the BPM Offset in semitones from original note of the third
Tempo arpeggiators note.
C RNG
H NO4
Range of the arpeggiator in octaves. The
Offset in semitones from original note of the fourth
arpeggiator steps up / down to reach this limit after
arpeggiators note.
each arp cycle.
D LEN I Not Used
Length of arpeggiated notes.
E LEG J Note Used
Legato allows overlapping notes to be played.

7 Patterns Advanced
Arpeggiator Quick Reference
Arp Function Parameter Description Additional Comments
MOD OFF Deactivates the arpeggiator
Plays notes in the order in which they have

MOD TRU
been entered
Notes played in ascending order, low to

MOD UP
high per octave.
Notes played in descending order, high to

MOD DWN
low per octave.
Notes played in ascending and then

MOD CYC
descending order
Plays random notes from first octave, then

MOD SHF
second etc
MOD RND Plays random notes
MOD PLY Plays chords in note order as entered. Must be in Polyphonic mode.
Speed of the arpeggiator with respect to Entry refers to the note interval 6 = 16th
SPD SPD
project BPM. meaning 16 trigs, 12= 8th , 24 = 4th (1 - 96)
Notes are transposed by an octave after
RNG RNG Octave range of the arpeggiator. every cycle is complete and restarts at the
RNG setting
Allows play of next note before the previous
LEG ON Plays overlapping notes.
is released. LEN affects this setting.
LEG OFF Sends MIDI Off at start of each arp note
LEN LEN Length of the arpeggiated notes
NO2 NO2 Offset for first of 3 additional arp notes

Offset based on original Trig and is in
semitones. Notes setup parameters also
NO3 NO3 Offset for second of 3 additional arp notes affect this (TRK KEY SCALE, TRK KEY
NOTE). Only these are available for
parameter locking in the Arp menu.
NO4 NO4 Offset for third of 3 additional arp notes
Data Entry (E) to adjust the Length in the

Arp Setup Arp Length Arpeggiator Length
Arp Setup Menu - Max 16 Steps
Press TRIG + adjust Data Entry (J) in Arp

Arp Setup Note Offset Enter arpeggiator note offsets
Setup Menu

Patterns Advanced 7
Arpeggiator Deep Dive & Examples
1 NOTE TRIG
A standard Note trig will activate a step. This note duration when
LEN
using the arpeggiator would need to be long enough to play out
any arpeggio notes. Note length is found in the [NOTE] Menu.
Arp Speed SPD governs the Trig steps note intervals covered
Track 1
Arp SPD 24 12 6
1 MOD, SPD & RNG

A standard Note trig will activate a step and if MOD is set to
anything other than OFF and will also trigger the arpeggio based
on the arp mode selected.
Track 1
Arp Example shows Note Trig Middle C, 60BPM: MOD = UP, SPD =
24 (1/4) and RNG = 2 Octaves.
Octave 2
Octave 1
1 ADDITIONAL NOTES
Up to 3 additional arp notes can be added referenced to the
original note trig. These are NO2, NO3, NO4 and will be added in
order, unless the MOD dictates the order based on the semitone
value.
Track 1
Arp
Example shows Note Trig F plus NO2 = Off, NO3 +4, NO4 +7 (F
Major Chord notes) =, 60BPM: MOD = UP, SPD = 12 (1/8) and
RNG = 1 Octave.
1 Example as above but with MOD = CYC, SPD = 6 (1/16).

Triggers at every step in the sequence.
Track 1
Arp

7 Patterns Advanced
11 ADDITIONAL NOTES OVER 2 OCTAVES
Major Chord notes) =, 60BPM: MOD = UP, SPD = 12 (1/8) and
RNG = 2 Octaves.
Track 1
Arp
Octave 2
Octave 1
11 ARPEGGIATOR SETUP
The [FUNC] + [ARP] Setup menu allows changing of the arp
length, step timing and also selection of the active arp steps.
Track 1
Arp Major Chord notes) =, 60BPM: MOD = CYC, SPD = 6 (1/16) and
RNG = 1 Octave. Triggers at every step in the sequence.
Arp cycles over

duration of trig /
sequence
Arpeggiator Setup Menu

Arp settings, length 8. Trig [1] … [16] keys in the arp setup menu
LEN allow selection of the arp notes. DATA ENTRY (E) to set Length.
8
ARP T1
Individual Arp notes can be offset in pitch by pressing and holding

LEN TRIG [1] … [16] + DATA ENTRY (J). In this example illustration
8 shows 2,4,7 offset and 3 and 6 Off - set by selecting Trig in Arp
Setup page.
OFS
ARP T1 5

Patterns Advanced 7
1 CHORDS & POLYPHONY

Chords can be arpeggiated when setting the system polyphony
on and using multiple voices. This is set in the KIT menu setting
for POLY CONFIG and accessed by [FUNC] + [KIT] in MkI and
F G F [FUNC] + [MIX] in MkII. MOD is set to PLY. Trigs can be set to
Track 1
trigger the chord.
Arp
Example =, 60BPM: MOD = PLY, SPD = 48 and RNG = 1 Octave.
Note Trig 1 - F plus NO2 = Off, NO3 +4, NO4 +7 (F Major)
Note Trig 5 - G plus NO2 = Off, NO3 +4, NO4 +7 (G Major)

F G F
Note 13 Triggers from Arp Setting

7 Patterns Advanced
NOTES
▌SETTING ARPEGGIO PLAYBACK ON / OFF
1. Select Track. Each track can be arpeggiated.
2. Press [ARP] to open menu.
3. Set MOD using data entry (A) to off to switch arpeggiator off and any
other setting to switch it on to the selected mode.
▌CREATING AN ARP SEQUENCE
1. On the selected track, set trig(s) and ensure LEN setting in the [NOTE]
menu allows for arpeggio playback on trigger of trig step.
3. Adjust the settings to match the desired settings of the arpeggiator.
4. Press [FUNC] + [ARP] to set the arpeggiator sequence length data

entry (E) and offset the steps using TRIG [1]...[16] + data entry (J). Use
the trigs to mute arp notes when in ARP setup.
▌CREATING AN ARP USING CHORDS
1. On the selected track, set trig(s) and ensure LEN setting in the [NOTE]
menu allows for arpeggio playback on trigger of trig step.
2. Ensure POLYPHONY is set.
• Press [FUNC] + [KIT] MkI or [FUNC] + [MIX] MkII to open menu.
• Scroll to POLY CONFIG + [YES] in MkI (MkII directly accesses this

menu)
• Set all 4 Voices to On.
5. Set MOD to PLY.
6. Set all the other settings to match the desired settings of the
arpeggiator.
7. Press [FUNC] + [ARP] to set the arpeggiator sequence.

Patterns Advanced 7
NOTES 7.9 Track Menu
TRACK MENU
Reload and save menu for tracks as well as the

note and arp setup menu’s accessed by [TRK]
MkII and [FUNC] + keyboard [E1] MkI
MK II + MK I
Select the track to be modified prior to opening and editing the menu options
NOTE SETUP ARP SETUP
Opens the note setup menu containing Opens the secondary arp setup window where
quantization, scale etc. [FUNC] + [NOTE] for length and arp step tuning and muting can be
quick access to the note menu. applied. [FUNC] + [ARP] for quick access.
SAVE TRACK RELOAD TRACK
Saves changes to the active track and is used Reloads the pattern from a previously saved state.
when developing tracks in order to quickly revert Note that changing patterns automatically saves
to a prior state when reloaded. Press [YES] + tracks which may or may not supersede the
[TRK] MkII or [YES] + keyboard [E1] MkI for manual save. Press [NO] + [TRK] MkII or [NO] +
quick save. keyboard [E1] for quick reload.

7 Patterns Advanced
7.10 Summary of Pattern Content NOTES
As a final summary in the coverage of patterns and sequencing it is worth

reminding of what constitutes a pattern.
Note Trigs
All Tracks
Lock Trigs Trig Mutes

All Tracks All Tracks
Trig Swing Trig Accents
Note Menu PATTERN Arp Menu
Time Kit Link

Signature Information
Parameter Note &

Locks Parameter Slide
Track
Lengths

Patterns Advanced 7
NOTES 7.11 Summary of Trig Options
As a final summary on the topic of trigs, a collective summary of what
affects trig steps is worth reviewing.
Note Trigs
Parameters
Lock Trigs Trig Mutes
Trig Swing Trig Accents
Nudge & Arp

MicroTune TRIG
Trigger
Sound
Conditional
Lock
Parameter Note &

Locks Parameter Slide
Pitch

NOTES

8
Chains & Songs
Analog Four has 4 pages of 16 steps each
making a pattern length of 64 trig steps. The
length overall doesn't end there and patterns
can be ‘chained’ into a sequential series of
patterns. In addition ‘songs’ can be created
consisting of an arrangement of pattern chains
built up into a series of rows. Complex features
and programming of the chains and songs, for
example setting the number of times to play a
pattern or automatic transpositions at points in
a song can be programmed into the song
structure and its arrangement. This enables
longer and more complex sequences to be built
and full song melodies to be created. Analog
Four has 16 song slots enabling the saving and
recalling of a library of songs that have been
created. This section covers the creation of
both chains and songs and also their
management and storage.

8 Chains & Songs
8.1 Patterns, Chains & Song Overview NOTES
A chain is a sequence of patterns linked to play together in a linear order

and which can be collectively arranged to form songs.
Pattern
A03 B02 C04 C04

Song
A03 B02 C04 C04
Chain
Up to 64 Chains with up to 248 Pattern entries
Songs contain ‘Song Row’s’ which are an arrangement of patterns into chains and
also have a ‘Scratch Pad’ row used for trialing and testing pattern combinations
Song Row Number of times the

Number row will play
OO: 1 X AO3 BO2 CO4 A03 B02 C04
O1: 2 X AO8 BO4 A08 B04
O2: 4 X BO1 BO2 EO4 B01 B02 E04
__: 1 X DO3 DO2 BO4 D03 D02 B04
Scratch Pad Chain of Patterns

Chains & Songs 8
NOTES 8.2 Working with Chains
A chain is a group of patterns, assembled across a sequential arrangement
by pattern bank / number. Two modes exist for editing chains. 1. Detailed
mode, for more comprehensive editing and 2. Quick mode to quickly add
patterns.
A01
A03 B02 C04 C04
Chains play in the row left to right. Bottom of display will
Chain show chain when playing or scratch pad when stopped
In MkII, chain mode key is called CHAIN MODE and in MkI it is labelled simply as CHAIN. In
this guide the term [CHAIN MODE] is used and applicable to both.
▌VIEWING CHAINS
1. The chain scratch pad will be shown at the bottom of the parameter and
general displays.
2. Hold [CHAIN MODE] to show a long view of the chained patterns.
▌CREATING A NEW CHAIN IN DETAILED MODE
1. Press [CHAIN MODE] to enter CHAIN mode. Chain mode is lit.
2. Press [FUNC] + [CHAIN MODE] to create a blank scratch pad row
• The new chain scratch pad row will appear as the bottom row.
• The previous scratch pad row will be added and can be seen
as a song row in sequential order in song mode.
• Editing can be done in detailed or quick mode.
• Active pattern is the default starting pattern.

8 Chains & Songs
NOTES
▌ADDING / REPLACING A PATTERN IN A CHAIN IN DETAILED MODE
2. Press [CHAIN MODE] + [LEFT] [RIGHT] to move and position the

cursor to the location at where to add a pattern.
• The cursor is indicated by square brackets / parenthesis over a

pattern or with a vertical line between patterns
• Cursor can be positioned on, before or after patterns but placing the
cursor on a pattern will replace the existing pattern.
• The cursor placed before / after a pattern will add the pattern in that
location.
3. Press BANK [A] - [H] and TRIG [1] - [16] to select the pattern at the
location of the edit cursor.
▌DELETING A PATTERN IN A CHAIN IN DETAILED MODE
2. Press [CHAIN MODE] + [LEFT] [RIGHT] to move and position the

cursor to highlight the pattern to remove (or locate the cursor
immediately after the pattern to remove).
3. Press [CHAIN MODE] + [NO] to delete the highlighted pattern.
4. The pattern that was highlighted, or if the cursor was between patterns ,
then pattern before the cursor will be deleted from the chain.

Chains & Songs 8
NOTES
▌ADDING A PATTERN TO A CHAIN IN QUICK MODE
1. Press and hold BANK [A] - [H] and TRIG [1] - [16] to select the pattern
to add to the chain.
2. While retaining hold of the first TRIG press the second / additional
pattern TRIG [1] - [16].
3. Continue adding patterns as per step 2.
4. In quick mode:-
• Patterns can only be added in quick mode from same bank.
• Previous chain will be erased.
• Pattern change mode must be set to SEQUENTIAL which is the

default mode.
▌PLAYING A CHAIN
1. Playing a sequence outside of chain mode will play the current pattern
only.
2. Press [CHAIN MODE] to select chain mode.
3. Playing the sequence in chain mode will cycle through all patterns and
then stop after all patterns in the chain have been completed.

8 Chains & Songs
8.3 Song Mode Overview
Song mode goes a stage further than chains allowing the arrangement of rows sequentially to build
a bigger and more complete song. In MkII Song Mode key is called SONG MODE indicated by a
song symbol and in MkI it is labelled simply as SONG. In this guide the term [SONG MODE] is used
and applicable to both. Song mode is accessed by pressing [SONG MODE] for playback and to
access the set up and edit page use [FUNC] + [SONG MODE].
Tempo & Transport Status
Song
Bars / Beats playing
121
OO: 1X AO3 BO2 CO4 BO2
OOOO1:1
O1: 2X AO8 BO4
O2: 4X BO1 BO2 EO4 BO2 T -+ O Transposition
O3: 4X AO3 BO2 CO4 BO2
Selected Pattern
__: 1X DO3 DO2 BO4 OOOO1:1
Song Muted Tracks
Bar / Beat of active pattern
The upper right display shows song specific parameters and reflect the entire song. The bottom
right part of the display covers only the selected pattern. Part of this area may show blank if a
pattern is not selected. The centre / left of the screen covers the numbered song rows / chain
structures, repeats and also the scratch pad chain.
Navigate using [UP], [DOWN], [LEFT], [RIGHT].

Chains & Songs 8
NOTES
Song Mode : Edit Song
Song Row Number of times the Indicates more patterns /

Number row will play rows available out of view
OO: 1 X AO3 BO2 CO4 BO2

Inverted pattern indicates
playback position. Flashing
Song Plays Top to Bottom at the end of each row
indicates cued pattern.

O1: 2 X AO8 BO4
O2: 4 X BO1 BO2 EO4 BO2
O3: 4 X AO3 BO2 CO4 BO2 Edit cursor can be on (to

replace) or in-between (to
Insert / add) patterns
O4: 2 X AO8 BO4
Pressing [YES] on a highlighted
pattern during playback wIll cue the
pattern for next playback
O5: 2 X BO1 BO2 EO4 BO2
__: 1 X DO3 DO2 BO4 Scratch Pad Row
Each Row Plays Left to Right First
If Scratch pad is at the bottom and is selected to be played then the chain will play and
stop at the end. The scratch pad row can be moved from the bottom to a different row. If
the scratch pad is in sequence after the playing row position then playback will skip the
scratch pad row and play the next row. If playback is set within the scratch pad then the
scratch pad row will play and continue to the next row. The location of the scratch pad row
will determine where new rows are added [FUNC] + [CHAIN] when NOT in Song Mode i.e.
row moved above the scratch pad row

8 Chains & Songs
8.4 Working in Song Mode NOTES
Songs are can be created in the song edit mode accessed by [FUNC] +
[SONG MODE] - Song led lit.
▌VIEWING SONG STRUCTURES
1. Press [SONG MODE] to play and display songs.
2. The song row played will be shown at the bottom of the parameter and
general screens when playing in song mode (not song edit mode
screen) - song led lit when in song mode.
3. Press [FUNC] + [SONG MODE] to enter edit mode and view the entire
song structure.
▌ADDING A PATTERN TO A SONG
1. Press [FUNC] + [SONG MODE] to enter song edit mode.
2. Use [UP] [DOWN] [LEFT] [RIGHT] to navigate the song structure.
3. Navigate to the location in between patterns, or at the end of a row to

add a new pattern to that song row.
4. Select the pattern the same way as selecting patterns normally. Press
and hold BANK [A] - [H] and TRIG [1] - [16] to select the pattern to add
to the chain.
5. Pattern will be added at the location selected.
▌REPLACING A PATTERN IN A SONG
3. Navigate on to the pattern to replace with a new pattern. A box will

indicate the selection cursor.
4. Select the pattern the same way as selecting patterns normally. Press
to the chain.
5. The pattern will replaced by the new one selected.

Chains & Songs 8
NOTES
▌ADDING A NEW ROW TO A SONG
2. Use [UP] [DOWN] [LEFT] [RIGHT] arrows to navigate the song

structure/
3. Navigate to the row prior to where to insert the new row.
4. Press [FUNC] + [YES] to add the new row after the row selected.
5. A01 Pattern will be added on the new row as the default first pattern
▌CREATING A CHAIN ON THE ROW OF A SONG
3. Navigate on to the new pattern location. Cursor is a horizontal line. New

rows have A01 as the default first pattern.
4. Select the pattern the same way as selecting patterns normal. Press
to the chain.
5. Further patterns can be added along the row to create a chain.
▌DELETING A PATTERN AND ROW IN A CHAIN / SONG

structure.
3. Navigate on to the pattern to delete. A box cursor will highlight the

pattern to delete.
4. Press [FUNC] + [NO] to delete the pattern selected.
5. Continue deleting multiple patterns with [FUNC] + [NO] to remove

patterns individually and eventually remove the chain row.

8 Chains & Songs
NOTES
▌REARRANGING A PATTERN IN A SONG CHAIN
1. Press [FUNC] + [SONG MODE] to enter Song Edit mode.

structure
3. Navigate on to the pattern to move. A box cursor will highlight the

pattern to selected.
4. Press [FUNC] + [LEFT] or [FUNC] + [RIGHT] to move the pattern to a

new location in the chain.
▌REARRANGING ROWS IN A SONG

structure
3. Navigate on to the row to move. A box cursor will highlight a pattern or

horizontal line in-between patterns on the selected row.
4. Press [FUNC] + [UP] or [FUNC] + [DOWN] to move the row to a new

location in the song.
▌SETTING THE PLAYBACK REPEAT OF A ROW CHAIN IN A SONG

structure
3. Navigate on to the left most location, usually indicated by a numerical

multiplier 1x, 4x etc, on the row to edit
4. Adjust data entry (A) to select the number of times the row will repeat
during song playback before moving to the next row.

Chains & Songs 8
NOTES
▌SETTING AUTOMATIC MUTING OF TRACKS IN SONG MODE
Muting tracks in song mode is called SONG MUTE. This mutes tracks
automatically per pattern at specific points in a song as configured in song
mode. Muted tracks are indicated in the song mode screen.
2. Use [UP] [DOWN] [LEFT] [RIGHT] arrows to navigate to the pattern

where the muting setting are to be edited.
3. Press [FUNC] + Track [1] - [6] of the track to mute automatically when
the selected pattern is played back in song mode.
4. Press [FUNC] + Track [1] - [6] of the track to restore / unmute any
muted tracks assigned to the pattern in song mode.
▌SETTING AUTOMATIC TRANSPOSE OF PATTERNS IN SONG MODE
Patterns can be transposed individually and automatically when playing in

song mode. Transposed status is indicated on the song mode screen,
default T+/-0 is note C1 and transpositions would be made from this point.
2. Use [UP] [DOWN] [LEFT] [RIGHT] arrows to navigate to the pattern

location to be transposed.
3. Press [TRNS] MkII or [TRANSPOSE] MkI + keyboard note to transpose

to for the selected pattern.

8 Chains & Songs
NOTES
▌COPY, PASTE & CLEARING A SONG ROW / CHAIN
The system copy, paste and clear commands operate within song
mode using [FUNC] + [REC], [STOP], [PLAY] respectively.

structure to select the location to Copy, Clear, Paste.
• Press [FUNC] + [REC] to copy the chain.
• Press [FUNC] + [PLAY] to clear all chain patterns excluding

the first one.
• Press [FUNC] + [STOP] to paste a copied chain above cursor

row.
▌UNDO PASTE & CLEAR OF A SONG ROW / CHAIN
The paste and clear commands can delete or overwrite existing chains and
rows. To undo the action repeat the command previously activated.
1. After a clear, paste action, repeat the key command
• Press [FUNC] + [PLAY] to UNDO the previous clear of a chain
• Press [FUNC] + [STOP] to UNDO the previous paste of a

chain.

Chains & Songs 8
NOTES
▌PLAYING A SONG
2. Press [PLAY] to play the song.
• Song will play from selected pattern, across each row chain with the
number of repeats set and then onto the next row until completion.
• Playback will stop at the end of the song.
• Within the general Analog Four pages the current chain row will
show at the bottom of each screen.
▌SETTING THE PLAY START POSITION WITHIN THE SONG

structure to select the first pattern to start playback.
3. Press [YES] to select the pattern as the start. This pattern indication will
become inverted or flash (cued) if a song is currently playing.
4. Press [PLAY] and playback will now start from this position and will play
until the end. If song is playing the selected pattern will be cued to play
after the prior pattern completes.
• If a scratch pad pattern is selected as the song start location then

the scratch pad chain will be played first then on to the next row
otherwise the scratch pad is normally skipped during song playback.
▌SETTING THE PLAY START POSITION TO THE SONG BEGINNING
2. Press [STOP] [STOP] i.e. twice to select the very first pattern in the
chain as the playback position start location.
▌EXITING SONG MODE
1. In SONG MODE, Press [SONG MODE] to exit. Song mode is unlit.

8 Chains & Songs
8.5 Song Menu NOTES
Song menu offers additional song related features. This menu is accessed
by [SONG] MkII and [FUNC] + keyboard [G1] MkI. Options within the song
menu are:-
• Reload : Reload previously saved song.

• Load : Load a saved song.
• Save : Save to a song slot 1-16.
• Clear : Clear fully the active song.
• Edit : Opens song edit mode, same as [FUNC] + [SONG MODE].
• Rename : Opens system rename menu.
▌SAVING A SONG
1. Press [SONG] MkII or [FUNC] + keyboard [G1] MkII to open SONG

MENU.
2. Use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN] to scroll to SAVE option.
3. Press [YES] to save.
4. Use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN] to scroll to one of the 1-16 song
slots available.
5. Press [YES] to save.
6. Rename window option opens to set / change the song name. Set or
accept the existing name and then press [YES] to save and exit menu.
▌LOADING A SONG

MENU.
2. Use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN] to scroll to LOAD option.
3. Press [YES] to load.
4. Use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN] to scroll to one of the 1-16 song
slots available to load from.
5. Press [YES] to load.

Chains & Songs 8
NOTES
▌RELOAD CURRENT SONG FROM SONG MENU

MENU.
2. Use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN] to scroll to RELOAD option.
3. Press [YES] to reload the previously saved version of the current song.
▌QUICK RELOAD OF CURRENT SONG
1. Press [NO] + [SONG] MkII or [NO] + keyboard [G1] MkII to reload the
previously saved song.
▌FULLY CLEARING THE SONG

MENU.
2. Use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN] to scroll to CLEAR option.
3. Press [YES] to clear the current song.
4. Press [YES] to confirm clearing of the current song.
▌RENAMING A SONG

MENU.
2. Use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN] to scroll to RENAME option.
3. Press [YES] to enter the renaming menu for the current song.
▌ENTERING SONG EDIT MODE FROM SONG MENU

MENU.
2. Use (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN] to scroll to EDIT option.
3. Press [YES] to enter the song edit menu.

8 Chains & Songs
8.6 Song / Chain Quick Reference - MkII
MK II
Function Key Command Description

CHAINS
Chain Mode On/Off [CHAIN MODE] When on the button is lit
View Chain Hold [CHAIN MODE] View from any parameter page
New Chain row [FUNC] + [CHAIN MODE] New scratch pad row added and previous moved up
Select Pattern in Chain [CHAIN MODE] + [LEFT] or [RIGHT] Navigate onto / in between patterns in row left / right
In Chain Mode, Replaces a selected pattern or
Adding Pattern BANK A-H + Trig [1] - [16]
inserts between
Deleting Pattern [CHAIN MODE] + [NO] Deletes selected pattern in the chain
Playing Chain [PLAY] Chain Mode must be ON
SONG
Song Mode On/Off [SONG MODE] When on button is lit
Playing Song [PLAY] Song Mode must be ON
Start at Beginning [STOP] [STOP] In song mode, Sets position to first row first pattern
Song Edit Mode [FUNC] + [SONG MODE] Enters Song Edit mode
Setting Play Position [YES] Song Edit mode navigate to location, press Yes
Deleting a song row [FUNC] + [NO] Deletes each pattern in the chain, repeat for row
Deleting a song row [FUNC] + [PLAY] Clears entire row
Copying a song row [FUNC] + [REC] Copies entire row
Pasting a song row [FUNC] + [STOP] Pastes copied row to current row
Moving a song row [FUNC] + [UP] [DOWN] Moves current row up or down in song in song mode
Adding a song row [FUNC] + [YES] Adds a song row in edit mode
Setting row repeat DATA ENTRY (A) Select multiplier on left of row to set repeat multiplier
Setting pattern transpose [TRNS] + Keyboard Note Transposes selected pattern
Setting Song Mutes [FUNC] + [TRACK] Mutes tracks for the selected pattern in song
Reload current song [NO] + [SONG] Reloads previous saved song
Select Song Menu [SONG] Opens song menu

Chains & Songs 8
8.6 Song / Chain Quick Reference - MkI
MK I
Function Key Command Description

CHAINS
Chain Mode On/Off [CHAIN] When on the led is lit
View Chain Hold [CHAIN] View from any parameter page
New Chain row [FUNC] + [CHAIN] New scratch pad row added and previous moved up
Select Pattern in Chain [CHAIN] + [LEFT] or [RIGHT] Navigate onto / in between patterns in row left / right
In Chain mode, replaces a selected pattern or inserts
Adding Pattern BANK A-H + Trig [1] - [16]
between
Deleting Pattern [CHAIN] + [NO] Deletes selected pattern in the chain
Playing Chain [PLAY] Chain Mode must be ON
SONG
Song Mode On/Off [SONG] When on led is lit
Playing Song [PLAY] Song Mode must be ON
Start at Beginning [STOP] [STOP] In song mode, Sets position to first row first pattern
Song Edit Mode [FUNC] + [SONG] Enters Song Edit mode
Setting Play Position [YES] Song Edit mode navigate to location, press Yes
Deleting a song row [FUNC] + [NO] Deletes each pattern in the chain, repeat for row
Deleting a song row [FUNC] + [PLAY] Clears entire chain, keeps first pattern
Copying a song row [FUNC] + [REC] Copies entire chain row
Pasting a song row [FUNC] + [STOP] Pastes copied row to current row
Moving a song row [FUNC] + [UP] [DOWN] Moves current row up or down in song in song mode
Adding a song row [FUNC] + [YES] Adds a song row in edit mode
Setting row repeat DATA ENTRY (A) Select multiplier on left of row to set repeat multiplier
Setting pattern transpose [TRANSPOSE] + Keyboard Note Transposes selected pattern
Setting Song Mutes [FUNC] + [TRACK] Mutes tracks for the selected pattern in song
Reload current song [NO] + [SONG] Reloads previous saved song,
Select Song Menu [FUNC] + Keyboard [G1] - SONG Opens song menu

NOTES

9
Effects
Analog Four contains a powerful feature set external audio into the Analog Four is also
when it comes to effects. The Analog Four has contained within the FX track page. FX
a chorus, delay and reverb effect which Modulation includes LFO functionality for the
operates in a send / return configuration. The specific FX track. The LFO operates in line with
effects themselves are contained within the FX same features and functionality as the other
track (Track 5) while the ‘send’ function is synth tracks. Even more power can be unlocked
contained within each of the other tracks, found when using effects in conjunction with other
on the AMP page. Each of the effects has a little Analog Four features such as the performance
more than the traditional function set. Wideshift macros, parameter locks and modulation.
chorus has an orientation to the panning and
width elements of the chorus effect. Saturator
delay contains an overdrive feature adding
more grit and distortion within the effect.
Supervoid reverb has tight EQ control. The
effects also interact together and the routing
between each effect can also add to the power
of creative sound design. The advantage of the
FX dedicated track means external audio can
also take advantage of the Analog Four effects
section as well as the Analog Four filter and
other synth elements. The ability to manage

9 Effects
9.1 Effect Structure NOTES
All the effects operate as sends from each synth track and track 5 hosts the
actual effects.
Pan
Ext In Ext In Ext In Sends
Chorus
AMP
Synth Track
Delay
Delay
AMP
Reverb
AMP
Effects Sends
Chorus Delay Reverb

FX Track 5
LFO1
LFO P1
Chorus Delay Reverb
LFO2 L R
LFO P2
TRACK 1 - 4
Effects Return
PERFORMANCE MIXER
Mix
The Send amount settings for each effect are found in the AMP page of each synth track. The settings
for each effect are found in dedicated pages of Track 5 - the FX track. The Effects track also has 2
LFO’s each with 2 assignable destinations. These can be assigned to modulate FX parameters.

Effects 9
NOTES 9.2 FX Track 5
Track 5 hosts the actual effect settings for chorus, delay and reverb. In
addition the LFO’s and external Inputs are also set within the FX track.
▌ACCESSING FX TRACK SETTINGS
1. Press TRACK [FX] - Track 5.
2. Parameters are now accessible as labelled on the top line (second /

grey line on MkI) of the parameter page buttons.
3. The previous synth track will be illuminated dim to indicate that a

keyboard will trigger the indicated synth track.
4. Pressing TRACK [FX] a second time will fully and uniquely select the
FX track only. Keyboard will now only trigger FX track.
▌MUTING FX TRACK
1. Press [FUNC] + TRACK [FX] - Track 5.
2. FX will be muted.
▌CLEARING FX TRACK
1. Press TRACK [FX] - Track 5 + [PLAY].
2. FX will be cleared and reset.
▌COPY / PASTE FX TRACK SETTINGS
Useful when experimenting and to return to a previous state.
1. Press TRACK [FX] - Track 5 + [REC] to copy settings
2. Press TRACK [FX] - Track 5 + [STOP] to paste settings

9 Effects
9.3 Wideshift Chorus Settings
Wideshift chorus parameters are available within the FX Track 5.
A PRE F HPF
Pre-delay time setting of the chorus. 0-127 Range High pass filter frequency setting of the signal input
of the chorus. 0-127 Range
B SPD G LPF
Speed of the low frequency oscillation which Low pass filter frequency setting of the delay taps of
modulates the chorus. 0-127 range. the chorus. 0-127 Range
C DEP H DEL
Depth of the modulation chorus taps. 0-127 Range Send signal to the delay effect. This will be the
amount of the wet chorus signal. 0-127 Range
D WID I REV
Stereo width. 0-127 Range Send signal to the reverb effect. This will be the
amount of the wet chorus signal. 0-127 Range
E FDB J VOL
Feedback of the chorus taps. -64 +63 Range. Volume of the chorus effect. 0-127 Range

Effects 9
NOTES 9.4 Chorus Principles
The wideshift chorus follows many traditional principles of a chorus effect.
Chorus effects create a sound that is ‘thicker’ and ‘wider’ giving an
impression of multiple instruments playing at once. The effect is generally
created by slightly delaying a repeat of the original signal. Various
configurations exist and the wideshift chorus in the Analog Four follows
these basic principles also with an emphasis on the placement of the signal
in the audio panorama which widens the effect.
Generic Basic Chorus Structure
LFO
MODULATION
Input Delay + Output

Line
Analog Four Wideshift Chorus Structure
Sends
Delay & Reverb
LFO
MODULATION
Vol
Input
(Track Send)
Delay + Output
(return)
Hi Pass Filter
Line Lo Pass Filter
Width
Feedback
Initial Signal & Delay Feedback
Chorus delays are typically 5-15ms. Anything above 20ms starts to

become a doubling effect. Pre-delay time setting has a setting range of 0-
127 in the wideshift chorus where nominal time settings can be made.
All diagrams are for illustrative and representation purposes and do not necessarily constitute an accurate schematic or official circuit diagram

9 Effects
Generic Chorus Parameters NOTES
Rate / Speed
Speed of modulation for the chorus delay LFO. Traditionally this is set with
respect to frequency. The frequency is the oscillator rate (not a reference to
a pitch). In the Analog Four the parameter used is called SPD which sets
the speed of the oscillator modulation.
Depth
Traditionally this would apply to the pitch modulation within a generic

chorus effect. Within the Analog Four DEP sets the chorus tap amount and
essentially how much the modulation will affect the chorus.
Pre-Delay
Adjust how ‘expansive’ the chorus effect is and technically is the first delay
distance in time from the original. The lower the value the nearer to the
original sound it is.
Feedback
This feeds the chorus signal back into the the delay engine. Sometimes
called stages. This controls the amount of chorusing but can also give
distorted and loud ringing with extreme settings. The length of the chorus
‘tail’ is affected by feedback.
Effect Level / Volume
Adjust the amount of chorus effect returned to the main bus. In the
wideshift chorus FX page, this controls the actual effect.
Width
Positions the chorus effect in the output stereo field. This widens and pans
the effect.
High Pass Filter / Low Pass Filter
While not a typical functions within many chorus effects it is not unusual to
see a low pass filter on the delay line output which affects the chorus taps.
Also a high pass filter is provided on the delay line input. This allows the EQ
to be shaped on the chorus elements are provided on the wideshift chorus.
Tip: Lowering feedback and delay time can give more of a flanging style effect.
Flangers are variations on the chorus effect.

Effects 9
9.5 Saturator Delay Settings
Saturator delay parameters are available within the FX Track 5.
A TIM F HPF
Delay time of the effect with reference to the tempo High pass filter frequency setting of the delay taps of
BPM and set in 128th notes. [FUNC] + (A) for ‘on the effect
beat’ adjustment.
B X G LPF
Ping Pong setting of the stereo effect with 1 Low pass filter frequency setting of the delay taps of
ensuring the signal alternates fully across the stereo the effect
field and 0 will enable a manual setting based on the
WID parameter
C Not Used H OVR
Overdrive driving the delay effect and also will affect

the feedback
D WID I REV
Stereo width setting or placement in the field. Send signal to the Reverb effect. This will be the
Affected by Ping-Pong X setting. amount of the wet delay signal
E FDB J VOL
Feedback of the taps back into the delay. Overdrive Volume of the chorus effect.
will also affect the input into the feedback

9 Effects
9.6 Delay Principles NOTES
The saturator delay creates an ‘echo’ by repeating the original sound and
extending the sound tail over a longer soundscape. The effect is generally
created by delaying and repeat of the original signal both over time and
across the stereo field (called pink pong delay). Various configurations exist
but the saturator delay in the Analog Four follows most generic delay
principles with the addition of the overdrive feature.
Generic Basic Delay Structure
TIME
Input Delay + Output

Line
Analog Four Saturator Delay Structure
Tempo bpm Send

Chorus Reverb
TIME
Ping Pong X
1 0
Lo Pass Filter Vol

Input Delay OVERDRIVE + Output
(Track Send) (return)
Line Hi Pass Filter
Width
Feedback
Initial Signal & First Additional delay repeat ‘taps’ introduced

Repeat through feedback
Delay times are typically set in ms or more usually are synchronised

to the tempo beats per minute to define the delay repeat ‘taps’

Effects 9
NOTES Generic Delay Parameters
Delay Time
Time for a single echo from the original initial signal to repeat. The repeat of
the original signal will be heard at the defined interval set with delay time. In
the Analog Four the parameter used is called TIM and sets the timing in
128th note intervals which are synchronised to the tempo bpm. Hold [FUNC]
+ Turn (A) - TIM will adjust in on beat increments.
TIM - Delay Time Divide by Tempo TIM - Delay Time Divide by Tempo
128 1 12 1/16.
96 1/2. 8 1/16
64 1/2 6 1/32.
48 1/4. 4 1/32
32 1/4 3 1/64.
24 1/8. 2 1/64
16 1/8 1 1/128
Dotted notes are 50% longer than undotted notes
Sync
Traditional delays offer the option to sync to the tempo. This is set by
default in Analog Four.
Feedback
Feeds the repeated taps back into the the delay engine. This controls the
amount of echos and repeats and essentially the length of the delay ‘tail’.
Effect Level / Volume
Adjust the amount of delay effect returned to the main bus.
Width
Positions the delay effect in the output stereo field. This widens and pans
the effect. With Pink Pong delay set by parameter X in Analog Four, the
signal will alternate between left and right.
High Pass / Low Pass Filter
This allows the EQ to be shaped on the delay taps and can affect the high
and low frequency filtering levels. This setting adjust the cutoff.

9 Effects
9.7 Supervoid Reverb Settings
Supervoid reverb parameters are available within the FX Track 5.
A PRE F HPF
Pre-delay time setting of the chorus. This simulates High pass filter frequency setting of the signal input
the room size. 0-127 Range of the reverb. 0-127 Range
B DEC G LPF
Decay of the reverberated signal. This simulates the Low pass filter frequency setting of the signal input
room size of the reverb. 0-127 Range
C FRQ H Not Used
Frequency of the shelving EQ where the gain can

boost or especially dampening of the reverb signal.
0-127 Range
D GAI I Not Used
Gain where the shelf EQ at the set frequency can

boost or especially dampen the reverb signal. 0-127
Range
E Not Used J VOL
Volume of the chorus effect. 0-127 Range

Effects 9
NOTES 9.8 Reverb Principles
The supervoid reverb follows many traditional principles of a reverb effect.
Reverb effects simulate the reflected audio that would occur within an
acoustic room. The effect is generally created by simulating the reflected
signals and timing as if bouncing around the walls within a room.
50-80ms
Initial
Early Subsequent Reverb tail can vary
Original
Reflections Reflections dependant on room size
Signal
An emitted sound will be heard followed by the initial reflections, for

example direct from the walls within approx 100ms. Subsequent
reflections typically where sound bounces between walls will follow.
The room size and shape will therefore affect the reverberant sound
Analog Four Supervoid Reverb Structure
from
Delay & Chorus PRE-DELAY DECAY
TIME TIME FRQ GAI
Lo Pass Filter Vol

Input Output
(Track Send)
Hi Pass Filter
Reverb Shelving Filter
(return)

9 Effects
Generic Reverb Parameters NOTES
Pre-Delay
In reality the first sound heard after an initial sound event will be delayed
until it reaches our ears. Pre-delay simulates the delay in sound from the
original sound event and the first, early reflections being heard.
Reverb Time / Decay
After the early sounds are heard there will be further, multiple reflections
from walls, floors and ceilings. This have various timelines and will reduce
over time. This is simulated using the decay setting.
High Pass Filter / Low Pass Filter
The supervoid reverb carries a high pass and low pass filter at the signal
input to the reverb engine. Plate reverbs don't have much activity above
5kHz and cutting 4-8kHz can reduce metallic sounding reverb. Reducing
muddy elements in a mix can be helped by reducing the 150-300Hz levels
entering the reverb to create more clarity.
Traditional reverb parameters not specifically assigned in Analog Four
Type
Type is not a parameter that is available within the supervoid reverb but in
generic reverb terms is the type of modelling that will be applied. Many
mechanical devices such as plates and springs were used to simulate
rooms and over time have evolved into software variants.
Damping
Simulation of the reduction in the audio levels and reduction in higher

frequencies as the sound bounces. The supervoid reverb has a shelving
filter to reduce higher frequencies and simulate the natural fall off. Higher
frequencies decay in a room faster than low frequencies.
Width
Positions the reverb effect in the output stereo field. This widens and pans
the effect.

Effects 9
9.9 Effects Workflow Overview
A summary and example workflow of working with effects and the FX track are as follows:-
OPTIONS S FX WALKTHROUGH CHECK LIST
Select FX Track 5
Clear Existing FX Page Settings

Select FX parameter page > [TRACK FX] + [PLAY] 1
Select Chorus
2 Press [Chorus] i.e. Filters page
Adjust Chorus Settings

3 Also set any send to Delay and Reverb
Select Delay
4 Press [Delay] i.e. Amp page
Adjust Delay Settings

5 Also set any send to Reverb
Select Reverb
6 Press [Reverb] i.e. Env page
7 Adjust Reverb Settings

If required, continue to adjust and
tweak the FX parameters as desired
cycle through process to get the sound you want
Select Synth Track
Select Amp Page

8 [AMP] Page is where the track sends are located
Adjust Send Levels

9 [AMP] Page > Adjust the send level for each effect for the track
Capture Current State

Track [FX ] + REC > Copy Settings. Can be used to restore 10
a captured state by using Paste, Track [FX] + [STOP]
Create or Save as a Kit

11 [FUNC] + Keyboard [C1] > Save Kit
Create a Performance Control for FX Sends

This will allow all send levels to be reduced to 0 together for 12
quick FX bypass
Sounds can be assembled into a Kit. A Kit consists of the 4 Synth Tracks, FX Track and The CV Track

9 Effects
9.10 Effects Setting Template
A blank FX template
WIDESHIFT CHORUS
Chorus Chorus
Data Entry Setting Date Entry Setting
Parameter Parameter
PRE A HPF F
SPD B LPF G
DEP C DEL H
WID D REV I
FDB E VOL J
SATURATOR DELAY
Chorus Chorus
Parameter Parameter
TIM A HPF F
X B LPF G
- C OVR H
WID D REV I
FDB E VOL J
SUPERVOID REVERB
Chorus Chorus
Parameter Parameter
PRE A HPF F
DEC B LPF G
FRQ C - H
GAI D - I
- E VOL J

Effects 9
9.11 External Audio Input FX Track Parameters
The FX track also manages the audio input routing which allows the Analog Four effects and
modulation to process external audio
A CHO F CHO
Left chorus send to wideshift chorus FX. 0-127 Right chorus send to wideshift chorus FX. 0-127
Range Range
B DEL G DEL
Left delay send to saturator delay FX. 0-127 Range Right delay send to saturator delay FX. 0-127
Range
C REV H REV
Left reverb send to the supervoid reverb FX. 0-127 Right reverb send to the supervoid reverb FX. 0-127
Range. Range.
D PAN I PAN
Left side panning of the external audio In. 0-127 Right side panning of the external audio In. 0-127
Range. Range.
E VOL J VOL
Left Volume of the external In. 0-127 Range Right Volume of the external In. 0-127 Range

9 Effects
9.12 Audio Input Routing NOTES
External audio can be routed through the FX section. This is explained in

the FX track. Also the external audio can be routed as a waveform into the
oscillator section.
Ext In
L R
Synth Track FX Track
Pan
Ext In
Oscillator Oscillator
1 AM & Sync
2
WAV
OSC2 P2
WAV Chorus
Ext In
OSC1 P1 OSC2 P1
Sends
Delay
Delay
Ext In
Ladder Sends
Filter
FLTR
Reverb
Ext In
Overdrive VOL
FLTR
Multimode
Filter
FLTR
AMP
PAN
The external Left and Right inputs can be routed through the FX track using the sends as
defined in the FX track ‘Ext In’ page. Also the WAV parameter can be set to Left or Right
input allowing an external audio processing chain through the synth functions.

Effects 9
NOTES 9.13 LFO Destinations
The LFO parameters and functions for the FX track operate the same as
other LFO parameters. The functionality is covered in detail in the Track
modulation section. The LFO destinations are specific to the FX track.
Meta None Off
Ext In CHO External LEFT Chorus
Ext In DEL External LEFT Delay
Ext In REV External LEFT Chorus
Ext In PAN External LEFT Pan
Ext In VOL External LEFT Volume
Ext In CHO External RIGHT Chorus
Ext In DEL External RIGHT Delay
Ext In REV External RIGHT Chorus
Ext In PAN External RIGHT Pan
Ext In VOL External RIGHT Volume
Chorus PRE Pre-delay
Chorus SPD Speed of modulation
Chorus DEP Depth of modulation
Chorus WID Stereo width
Chorus FDB Feedback
Chorus HPF Hi Pass Filter cutoff
Chorus LPF Lo Pass Filter cutoff
Chorus DEL Delay Send
Chorus REV Reverb Send
Chorus VOL Mix Volume
Delay TIM Delay Time
Delay X Ping Pong Setting
Delay WID Stereo Width
Delay FDB Feedback
Delay HPF Hi Pass Filter cutoff
Delay LPF Lo Pass Filter cutoff
Delay OVR Overdrive amount
Delay REV Reverb Send
Delay VOL Mix Volume
Reverb PRE Pre-delay
Reverb DEC Decay
Reverb FRQ Shelving Frequency
Reverb GAI Shelving Gain
Reverb HPF Hi Pass Filter cutoff
Reverb LPF Lo Pass Filter cutoff
Reverb VOL Mix Volume

NOTES

10
MIDI & USB
MIDI is an important and expected function of Some great musical arrangements can be
any modular device and especially in getting created when connecting and working with other
the best out of Analog Four when working with synths and devices. As well as using MIDI for
other gear. The MIDI In and OUT connections creative communications to other gear, MIDI
are joined by a welcome MIDI Thru connection protocols are used as part of the Analog Four
which re-transmits the MIDI In data. All housekeeping and maintenance functions. Data
connectors are 5 Pin DIN variety but MIDI is can be transferred for back up and when
also available across the USB connection. This transferring sound packs for example. Elektron
is useful when integrating to a PC / MAC DAW have develops the PC / Mac utility called
and especially when interfacing with Elektron Transfer that can transfer data between the PC
Overbridge technology. In addition MKII or Mac and also can be used for upgrades. A
Devices have audio over USB functionality with legacy Elektron sysex utility called C6 was
the ability to connect class compliant devices. historically used when transferring data from / to
Typical MIDI configurations include the use of the Analog four using a PC or Mac. This will in
an external keyboard and this function is of future be replaced by the Transfer utility but as of
course achievable in all of the Analog Four now C6 or another Sysex file management utility
models and has in fact an in built keyboard for should be used with the Analog Four for backups
Analog Keys. Elektron gear also has a turbo and file management.
speed feature which speeds up the
communication when connecting to other
Elektron and turbo speed compatible devices.

10 MIDI & USB
10.1 MIDI Definitions NOTES
To clarify some of the terminology and technology around MIDI with respect
to Analog Four.
5 PIN MIDI
MIDI DIN 24 MIDI DIN 48 MIDI
This is available from MIDI Out This is available from MIDI Out If the output settings are set to
and Thru and enables syncing and Thru and enables syncing MIDI, the connector will
of classic devices. This uses 0v of classic devices. This uses 0v transmit MIDI data but no pulse
& 5v messages as sync signals & 5v messages as sync signals signals. Never connect MIDI
at 24 pulses per quarter note at 48 pulses per quarter note gear to incompatible DIN
(PPQN). When set to DIN 24 in (PPQN). When set to DIN 48 in signals.
the settings midi sync pulses the settings midi sync pulses
are available but no midi data is are available but no midi data is
transmitted transmitted
MIDI CC MSB & LSB MIDI STANDARDS
MIDI Control and Note change Most Significant Byte and Least While there are MIDI standards
messages are used to Significant Byte. MSB provides defined, many synth developers
communicate with messages the 128 data resolution which is interpret this in slightly different
across midi values of 0-127. ok for most MIDI applications. ways. It is always worth
More advanced devices use reviewing the documentation
MSB and LSB values accompanying any gear to fully
increasing resolution to 16,384 understand each device and its
steps. level of midi implementation.
NRPN SYSEX SDS
NRPN as it is referred, is Non- System Exclusive. This is an Sample Dump Standard. This is
Registered Parameter Number expansion of the normal MIDI an older transfer protocol used
which is part of the MIDI communications set up and is for transferring data to and from
standard. CC and NRPN are typically used for transferring devices. Elektron use C6
technically very similar but data such as back ups, Software for this facility and is
NRPN is less well defined in the patches, presets and firmware still usable, however elektron
standards. NRPN uses more updates to and from devices. Transfer software is a more up
data and can give better to date utility. C6 is normally
control. used with Analog Four.

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES 10.2 MIDI Configuration
MIDI configuration is found in the GLOBAL SETTINGS menu. There are 4
sections which enable MIDI set up.
1. MIDI SYNC: Used for overall system synchronisation settings related to

clock. These include the general transport controls and song position.
2. MIDI PORT CONFIG: Configures the physical in / out port connection

settings. Typically between 5 Pin Midi and USB.
3. MIDI CHANNELS: Sets up the MIDI channel configuration related to

each track, performance mode, program changes and auto channel.
4. MULTI MAP EDITOR: Configuration settings for keyboard splits.
GLOBAL SETTINGS
MIDI CONFIG
SYNC
PORT CONFIG
CHANNELS
MULTI MAP EDIT
▌ACCESSING MIDI SETTINGS
1. Press [GLOBAL SETTINGS] on the MkII and [FUNC] + keyboard [C2]

GLOBAL on the MkI.
2. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight MIDI

CONFIG.
3. Press [YES] to select or [NO] to cancel to select and open the MIDI
CONFIG menu.

10 MIDI & USB
Global Settings > MIDI CONFIG Options
MIDI Config
Parameter Description
Page
Sync Clock Receive Analog Four receives an external device clock signal when ON
Sync Clock Send Analog Four Transmits midi clock when ON
Sync Transport Receive Analog Four reacts to system realtime messages ie Play, Stop when ON
Sync Transport Send Analog Four transmits system realtime messages i.e Play, Stop When On
Sync Prog Ch Receive Receiving program change messages ie for pattern change when ON
Sync Prog Ch Send Sends program change messages ie when a pattern is changed when ON
Port Config Turbo Speed Speed multiplier or AUTO when communicating to compatible devices
Port Config Out Port Functionality Type of signal the midi out port will send: MIDI, DIN 24, DIN 48 (1)
Port Config Thru Port Functionality Type of signal the midi thru port will send: MIDI, DIN 24, DIN 48 (1)
Port Config Input From Sets from where midi will be received: Disabled, Midi, USB, Midi+USB (2)
Port Config Output To Sets to where midi will be sent: Disabled, Midi, USB, Midi+USB (2)
Port Config Output Channel Sets whether mini keyboard and controls transit midi Auto or Midi channel
Port Config Param Output Sets whether data entry controls send NRPN or CC message out
Port Config Encoder Destination Data entry send: INT None, INT+EXT send internal & external
Port Config Keyboard Destination Keyboard send: INT None, INT+EXT send internal & external, EXT External
Port Config Mute Destination Track Mute send: INT None, INT+EXT send internal & external, EXT External
Port Config Receive Notes Enables external midi keyboard to play Analog Four
Port Config Receive CC/NRPN Enables external midi to Analog Four parameters with CC/NRPN messages
Port Config Live Rec on Track Chan ON Allows MIDI recording on tracks selected, OFF Auto Chan via active track
Midi Chan Track 1 Sets Midi Channel to control Track 1 or OFF
Midi Chan Track 5 FX Sets Midi Channel to control Track 5 FX or OFF
Midi Chan Track 6 CV Sets Midi Channel to control Track 6 CV or OFF
Midi Chan Perf Channel Sets Midi channel to transmit control data when in performance mode
Midi Chan Auto Channel Midi channel that will access the currently active track when using external KB
Midi Chan Prog Change In Chan Midi channel that will listen for program changes or Auto Chan
Midi Chan Prog Change Out Chan Midi channel that will send program change on pattern change or Auto Chan
Multi Map Menu Opens Multi Map Setting Options
(1) Classic DIN 24/48 operation will affect the [STOP] key operation and interfacing to external equipment. When STOP is pressed twice
quickly, the DIN sync outputs set to ‘ready to start’ mode meaning that the synced unit will start directly when the sequencer starts. Exit
the ready to start mode by a singular press of [STOP].
(2) MIDI & USB selections together may affect the communications speed.

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES 10.3 Setting Up an External MIDI Keyboard
An external MIDI controller, keyboard or sequencer can be connected to
Analog Four via the 5 pin MIDI In. In addition the Analog Four is equipped
with MIDI Out and MIDI Thru to connect additional equipment.
Example:
Keyboard only, notes play active track (no external control) : GLOBAL SETTINGS > MIDI Config
Midi Port Config > Input From = MIDI
Midi Port Config > Receive Notes = ON
Midi Channel > Auto Channel = 1
Forwards MIDI from MIDI

IN to MIDI THRU If a track is set in the notes track setup
to SEND MIDI then MIDI incoming data
Transmits MIDI OUT to is sent to MIDI outport
external devices
MIDI IN
5 Pin DIN
See the Analog Keys section for The original 5 Pin MIDI connector
more in depth details on the used for connecting electronic audio
keyboard (Analog Keys or devices together under the Musical
External) settings and operations Instrument Digital Interface protocols
MIDI OUT
MIDI Keyboard Device Specific Settings & Parameters

Midi Output Port Config : MIDI Out
MIDI Channel = 1
Clock not sent externally

10 MIDI & USB
MIDI MULTI MAP OVERVIEW NOTES
An external MIDI keyboard input range or individual notes can be mapped

to specific functions in the Analog Four. Often called keyboard splits, there
are 4 functions available within the Analog Four to be mapped to the
keyboard. Mapped zones and their type settings are called ENTRIES,
maximum 128.
INT TRIG
Triggers sounds from the sound pool or from the +Drive. Example is Mapped to C1 - B2 Range
with parameters explained as follows:-
NOTE INC
Sets the note increments played.
1 will give a 1 to 1 relationship eg C1 plays C1.
0 means only NOTE will play for any key.
2 will increment by 2 notes eg C1 to D1 to E1 etc
FIXED VOL
OFF is velocity sensitive.
A value 0-127 sets a
fixed velocity low to high.
INT TRIG
Triggers sounds from the project Sound Pool or
+Drive
RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH

Sets the keyboard note as the Sets the keyboard note as the
start of the range eg C1 end of the range eg B2
NOTE
Sets the start note within the
Analog Four that the start of the
range represents. Default would
be same as RANGE LOW eg C1
TRACK SOUND
Sets the Track 1,2,3,4, FX, CV that will be Sets the Sound slot (up to 128) to play
played by the range when a sound is not from the sound pool. OFF will play the
selected. Auto : Currently selected track selected track set within TRACK eg 2
1 2 3 4 ................ 125 126 127 128

<DELETE ENTRY>
Deletes the entire entry. Press [YES] to
confirm or [NO] to cancel
0 means same slot will play repeatedly.
<INSERT BEFORE>
Inserts a new entry prior to the existing entry. SOUND INC
The new entry ends prior to the note of the Sets the increment of the sound slot
current entry. Press [YES] to confirm representing the increments of the
keyboard notes
<INSERT AFTER>
Inserts a new entry after to the existing entry. 1 will increment sound slots by 1 to match keyboard
The new entry starts on the note following the 2 will increment sound slots by 2 for each successive note
current entry. Press [YES] to confirm

MIDI & USB 10
EXT TRIG
Triggers external devices and equipment from the note ranges activated in the Analog Four.
Example Mapped to C3 - E3 Range with parameters explained below.
NOTE INC
Sets the note increments played.
1 will give a 1 to 1 relationship eg C1 plays C1.
0 means only NOTE will play for any key.
2 will increment by 2 notes eg C1 to D1 to E1 etc
FIXED VOL
OFF is velocity sensitive.
A value 0-127 sets a
fixed velocity low to high.
EXT TRIG CHANNEL

Sets the MIDI Channel or set to AUTO
Triggers external
for transmitting the note messages to
devices
another device
NOTE
Sets the start note within the
Analog Four that the start of the
keyboard range represents.
DELETE ENTRY
confirm or [NO] to cancel
INSERT BEFORE
Inserts a new entry prior to the existing entry.
The new entry ends prior to the note of the
INSERT AFTER
Inserts a new entry after to the existing entry.
The new entry starts on the note following the
NONE
Sets a ‘No Play’ zone where the range will not trigger any function. Example Mapped to C0 - B0
Range with parameters explained below.

Sets the keyboard note as the Sets the keyboard note as the
<DELETE ENTRY> start of the range eg C1 end of the range eg B2
confirm or [NO] to cancel NONE
No Play Zone
<INSERT BEFORE>
<INSERT AFTER>

10 MIDI & USB
PAT PLAY NOTES
Maps a pattern to the keyboard range and / or transposes a pattern. Example Mapped to F3 -
C4 Range with parameters explained below.
PAT PLAY
Maps Pattern to
Keyboard

Sets the keyboard note as the Sets the keyboard note as
start of the range eg F3 the end of the range eg C4
TRANSPOSE PATTERN
Transposes the pattern by +/- 1-36 Selects which pattern A01 - H16 to play or
Semitones. 0 - No Transpose. CUR to play the current active pattern
TRANSPOSE INC PATTERN INC

Sets the increment of the transposition based on Sets the increment of the pattern based on the
the key pressed. 1 means successive key key pressed. 1 means successive key increments
increments give 1 transposition increment. 2 will give 1 pattern increments. 2 will step in patterns
step by 2 etc. 0 - No transpose. by 2 steps etc. 0 Plays same pattern each time
A 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
-2 -1 0 +1 +2 B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
C 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
.. C0 C1 C3 C4 .. E 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
F 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
C2 G 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
H 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 - H01 > H02 > H03 per successive note
CHG MODE
<DELETE ENTRY> Sets the starting mode of the pattern when changed.
confirm or [NO] to cancel D-STEP: Starts immediately from the first step
<INSERT BEFORE> D-JUMP: Starts from next step after current step
SEQ: Starts from first step once current seq ends
<INSERT AFTER>

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES MIDI MULTI MAP SETUP
A maximum of four multi map keyboard split configurations can be stored in

each of the 4 Analog Fours, global slots giving 4 multi maps per project.
Global slots are automatically saved and store the synth, MIDI, CV and
sequencer settings.
Project
Multi Map
EXT TRIG INT TRIG NONE PAT PLAY

Triggers external Triggers sounds from the project Sound Pool or No Play Maps Pattern to
devices +Drive Zone Keyboard
ENTRIES
Mapped Keyboard regions, types and settings
1 2 3 4
GLOBAL SLOT GLOBAL SLOT GLOBAL SLOT GLOBAL SLOT
1 Multi Mapped keyboard configuration can be stored in each of the 4 global slots.
Four global slots are available per project and are selected from within the
GLOBAL SETTINGS menu

10 MIDI & USB
NOTES
▌CREATING A NEW MULTI MAP ENTRY FROM SCRATCH
1. Press [GLOBAL SETTINGS] MkII or [FUNC] + [C2] MkI for GLOBAL.
2. Scroll to GLOBAL SLOTS using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
3. Select the slot number 1 - 4 using [LEFT] [RIGHT].
4. Press [YES] to confirm and accept or [NO] to cancel.
5. Scroll to MIDI CONFIG using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
6. Press [YES] to open MIDI CONFIG menu or [NO] to cancel.
7. Scroll to MULTI MAP EDIT using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
8. Press [YES] to open MIDI Map editor or [NO] to cancel.
9. Scroll to highlight ENTRIES using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
10. Press [YES] to confirm selection or [NO] to cancel.
11. Scroll using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to highlight.
• CREATE NEW ENTRY - To create a new blank entry.
• CREATE SPLIT - To create a new default split entry.
12. The new entry will be created and appear on the left of the display
named by the note split.
Initial opening menu in multi map editor Multi map menu with entries

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES
▌CLEARING ALL MULTI MAP ENTRIES FOR A SLOT
1. Press [GLOBAL SETTINGS].
2. Scroll to GLOBAL SLOTS using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
3. Select the Slot number 1 - 4 using [LEFT] [RIGHT].
4. Press [YES] to confirm and accept or [NO] to cancel.
5. Scroll to MIDI CONFIG using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
6. Press [YES] to open MIDI CONFIG menu or [NO] to cancel.
8. Press [YES] to open Midi Map editor or [NO] to cancel.
9. Scroll to highlight ENTRIES using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
11. Scroll using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to highlight CLEAR ALL
ENTRIES.
▌CLEARING / INSERTING A MULTI MAP ENTRY
The editor for individual entries is contained within the parameter

section of the multi map editor.
1. Scroll to highlight an ENTRY to edit using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK

LEVEL). Entries are indicated by the note range on the left.
2. Press [YES] to select the ENTRY and enable parameter editing. The
edit cursor will appear in the right side parameter list.
3. Scroll to highlight <DELETE ENTRY>, <INSERT BEFORE> or

<INSERT AFTER> using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
4. Press [YES] to select the function and if DELETE, [YES] again to

confirm. INSERT will give a warning if there is no mapping slot
available.

10 MIDI & USB
NOTES
▌EDITING AND CONFIGURING A MULTI MAP ENTRY
1. Ensure an external MIDI keyboard that will be mapped is connected and

communicating with the Analog Four. Note the channel number of the
MIDI communication.
2. Access Multi Map editor within current global slot: GLOBAL SETTINGS
> MIDI CONFIG.
3. Scroll to CHANNELS using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
4. Press [YES] to open CHANNEL setup or [NO] to cancel.
5. Scroll to PERF CHANNEL using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
6. Set performance channel and external keyboard MIDI Channel to the

same channel. MIDI mapping uses the performance channel setting.
Setting channel. Edit channel number using [LEFT] [RIGHT] or DATA
ENTRY.
7. Press [NO] to back out of CHANNELS menu.
9. Press [YES] to open the editor or [NO] to cancel.
10. Scroll to highlight an ENTRY to edit using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK

LEVEL). Entries are indicated by the note range on the left of the
display.
11. Press [YES] to select the ENTRY and to enable parameter editing. The
edit cursor will appear in the right side parameter list.
12. Scroll to highlight each parameter to edit using [UP] [DOWN] or

(TRACK LEVEL).
13. Edit each parameter using [LEFT] [RIGHT] or DATA ENTRY.
14. Editing the keyboard map note range will also be indicated on the mini
keyboard LED’s or if using the Analog Keys the keyboard LED’s.

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES EXAMPLE 1: MULTI MAP SETUP
One typical example is shown with an external 88 key keyboard to both

trigger any synth track and also a drum kit defined in the sound pool. Also 3
keys are configured to trigger 3 patterns.
Kick
Snare
Op Hat
Cl Hat
Lo Tom
Hi Tom
Crash
INT TRIG INT TRIG PAT PLAY

C0-B0 C1 - B3 C4 E4
INT TRIG: Triggers Sound INT TRIG: Triggers Track PAT PLAY: Triggers Pattern
Pool RANGE LOW: C0 RANGE LOW: C1 RANGE LOW: C4
RANGE HIGH: B0 RANGE HIGH: B3 RANGE HIGH: E4
TRACK: TRK1 TRACK: AUTO PATTERN: A08
NOTE: C0 NOTE: C1 PATTERN INC: 1
NOTE INC: 1 NOTE INC: 1 TRANSPOSE: 0
SOUND: 1 SOUND: OFF TRANSPOSE INC: 0
SOUND INC: 1 SOUND INC: 1 CHG MODE: D.JUMP
FIXED VEL: OFF FIXED VEL: OFF
Triggers a series of sound Area of keyboard C1-B3 Note C4 triggers pattern A08.
slots preconfigured in the operates as a 3 octave Each subsequent press D4,
slots 1-7. The range C0-B0 keyboard playing the E4 will cycle to pattern A09
with the velocity sensitivity currently selected track, and A10 at the next
active. Track setting is velocity sensitive. Sound sequence step prior to the
overridden by sound. setting is invalid. one recently played.
Preconfigure sound pool with

sound slots:
1.Kick, 2.Snare, 3.Open Hat,
4.Closed Hat, 5.Low Tom,
6.High Tom, 7.Crash Cymbal
3 ENTRIES
TIP: To play percussion and drums simultaneously eg a hi hat at the same time as a kick may
be helpful to set up multiple multi maps entries. For example map a hat to a different key zone
to that of the other percussion.

10 MIDI & USB
EXAMPLE 2: MULTI MAP SETUP NOTES
There are many multi map configurations that can be created. Another
example is shown with the keyboard mapped to both trigger a specific synth
track lead and another track for bass. Also a series of keys is configured to
transpose the current pattern.
BASS LEAD TRANSPOSE
INT TRIG INT TRIG PAT PLAY

C0-B0 C1 - B3 C4 B4
INT TRIG: Triggers Track INT TRIG: Triggers Track PAT PLAY: Transpose Only
RANGE LOW: C0 RANGE LOW: C1 RANGE LOW: C4
RANGE HIGH: B0 RANGE HIGH: B3 RANGE HIGH: B4
TRACK: TRK1 TRACK: TRK2 PATTERN: CUR
NOTE: C1 NOTE: C1 PATTERN INC: 0
NOTE INC: 1 NOTE INC: 1 TRANSPOSE: 1
SOUND: OFF SOUND: OFF TRANSPOSE INC: 1
SOUND INC: 1 SOUND INC: 1 CHG MODE: SEQ
FIXED VEL: OFF FIXED VEL: OFF
Triggers Track 1 Bass. The Area of keyboard C1-B3 Note C4 triggers a transpose
alignment is for the keyboard operates as a 3 octave of the pattern by 1 semitone.
C0 to be offset to the Analog keyboard playing a melody Each subsequent press D4,
Four where it triggers 1 across track 2, velocity E4 to B4 will increase the
octave up starting at C1 sensitive, starting at C1 on transposition by 1 semitone
Analog Four.. each.
Preconfigure sound pool with

sound slots:
1.Kick, 2.Snare, 3.Open Hat,
4.Closed Hat, 5.Low Tom,
6.High Tom, 7.Crash Cymbal
3 ENTRIES
TIP: Remember the voice limitations on the Analog Four and voice stealing principles when
using multi maps with multiple tracks and sounds.

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES 10.4 MIDI Sequence Notes Out
▌SENDING MIDI SEQUENCE NOTES OUT
1. Notes should be set on the tracks and as normal by sequencing a

pattern. Ensure that the MIDI settings allow output on MIDI or USB and
not in overbridge mode.
2. Select the track for the notes to send out to MIDI.
3. Select the note setup page, press [FUNC] + [NOTE].
4. The settings for the current track appear. Scroll to highlight the SEND
MIDI option for the track using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
5. Press [YES] to toggle on or off the SEND MIDI checkbox. To send MIDI
from the track ensure that each track required to send MIDI out is
checked / on.
6. Tracks with SEND MIDI also channel incoming MIDI data at the MIDI In
port to MIDI Out port.
7. Notes will be sent on the MIDI Channel set up in the global settings.
GLOBAL SETTINGS > MIDI CONFIG > CHANNELS. These can be
changed as desired.
8. Tracks selected will now send note on / off data and velocity when
triggered in the sequence as well as triggering the Analog Four synth.
9. Press [STOP], then [STOP] to send a MIDI all sound off message to all
MIDI channels.

10 MIDI & USB
NOTES
NOTE TRIG MIDI
MIDI is also output on the

CHANNEL set up and when
the track is set to SEND MIDI
MK I MK II
Active note trigs are indicated by Active note trigs are indicated
the led lit red over the trig keys. note
lit red on the trig keys. Unlit
Unlit keys contain no trigs keys contain no trigs
1
Triggers the synth or effects Trk 1
Will send output on the MIDI

1 channel for the track. This is set
in the CHANNELS setup
Note On Note Off

MIDI Note Out
Length
VELOCITY
Note ON and Note OFF(which

determines length) is sent as well as
note velocity to the MIDI output channel
to control external gear when SEND
MIDI is set on / checked for the track.
TIME

MIDI & USB 10
10.5 MIDI CC Assignments
Function Parameter Data Entry CC MSB CC LSB NRPN MSB NRPN LSB
Synth Osc 1 : Pitch A 16 (0-127) 48 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 0 (0-127)
Synth B 1 (0-127)
Synth Osc 1 : Detune C 1 (0-127) 2
Synth Osc 1 : Keytrack D 1 (0-127) 3
Synth Osc 1 : Level E 69 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 4
Synth Osc 1 : Waveform F 70 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 5
Synth Osc 1 : Sub Oscillator G 71 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 6
Synth Osc 1 : Pulsewidth H 72 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 7
Synth Osc 1 : PWM Speed I 73 (0-127) 1 (0-127)
Synth Osc 1 : PWM Depth J 74 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 9
Synth Noise: S&H A 75 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 10
Synth B 1 (0-127)
Synth Noise: Fade C 76 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 12
Synth D 1 (0-127)
Synth Noise: Level E 77 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 14
Synth F 1 (0-127)
Synth G 1 (0-127)
Synth H 1 (0-127)
Synth I 1 (0-127)
Synth J 1 (0-127)
Synth Osc 2 : Pitch A 17 (0-127) 49 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 20 (0-127)
Synth B 1 (0-127)
Synth Osc 2 : Level E 78 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 24
Synth Common: OSC1 AM A 1 (0-127) 30
Synth Common: Sync Mode B 1 (0-127) 31
Synth Common: Sync Amount C 84 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 32
Synth Common: Bend Amount D 85 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 33
Synth Common: Slide Time E 5 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 34
Synth Common: OSC2 AM F 1 (0-127) 35
Synth Common: Note Sync G 1 (0-127) 36
Synth Common: Vibrato Fade H 1 (0-127) 37
Synth Common: Vibrato Speed I 87 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 38
Synth Common: Vibrato Depth J 88 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 39

10 MIDI & USB
10.5 MIDI CC Assignments (cont)
Filters Filter 1 : Frequency A 18 (0-127) 50 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 40 (0-127)
Filters Filter 1 : Resonance B 89 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 41
Filters Filter : Overdrive C 1 (0-127) 42
Filters Filter 1 : Keytrack D 1 (0-127) 43
Filters Filter 1 : Envelope Amount E 102 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 44
Filters Filter 2 : Frequency F 19 (0-127) 51 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 45 (0-127)
Filters Filter 2 : Resonance G 90 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 46
Filters Filter 2 : Type H 1 (0-127) 47
Filters Filter 2 : Keytrack I 1 (0-127) 48
Filters Filter 2 : Envelope Amount J 103 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 49
Amp EnvA : Attack Time A 104 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 50
Amp EnvA : Decay Time B 105 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 51
Amp EnvA : Sustain Level C 106 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 52
Amp EnvA : Release Time D 107 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 53
Amp EnvA : Envelope Shape E 1 (0-127) 54
Amp Send Level : Chorus F 91 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 55
Amp Send Level : Delay G 92 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 56
Amp Send Level : Reverb H 93 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 57
Amp Pan I 10 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 58
Amp Volume J 7 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 59
EnvF EnvF : Attack Time A 108 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 60
EnvF EnvF : Decay Time B 109 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 61
EnvF EnvF : Sustain Level C 110 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 62
EnvF EnvF : Release Time D 111 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 63
EnvF EnvF : Envelope Shape E 1 (0-127) 64
EnvF EnvF : Gate Length F 1 (0-127) 65
EnvF EnvF : Destination A G 1 (0-127) 66
EnvF EnvF : Depth A H 20 (0-127) 52 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 67 (0-127)
EnvF EnvF : Destination B I 1 (0-127) 68
EnvF EnvF : Depth B J 21 (0-127) 53 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 69 (0-127)
Env2 Env2 : Attack Time A 112 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 70
Env2 Env2 : Decay Time B 113 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 71
Env2 Env2 : Sustain Level C 114 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 72
Env2 Env2 : Release Time D 115 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 73
Env2 Env2 : Envelope Shape E 1 (0-127) 74
Env2 Env2 : Gate Length F 1 (0-127) 75
Env2 Env2 : Destination A G 1 (0-127) 76
Env2 Env2 : Depth A H 22 (0-127) 54 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 77 (0-127)
Env2 Env2 : Destination B I 1 (0-127) 78
Env2 Env2 : Depth B J 23 (0-127) 55 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 79 (0-127)

MIDI & USB 10
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Speed A 116 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 80
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Speed Multiplier B 117 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 81
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Fade C 1 (0-127) 82
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Start Phase D 1 (0-127) 83
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Mode E 1 (0-127) 84
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Waveform F 1 (0-127) 85
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Destination A G 1 (0-127) 86
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Depth A H 24 (0-127) 56 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 87 0-127)
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Destination B I 1 (0-127) 88
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Depth B J 25 (0-127) 57 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 89 (0-127)
Synth LFO LFO 2 : Destination A G 1 (0-127) 96
Synth LFO LFO 2 : Depth A H 26 (0-127) 58 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 97 (0-127)
Synth LFO LFO 2 : Destination B I 1 (0-127) 98
Synth LFO LFO 2 : Depth B J 27 (0-127) 59 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 99 (0-127)
FX Ext In CH 1 : Chorus Send A 2 (0-127) 0
FX Ext In CH 1 : Delay Send B 2 (0-127) 1
FX Ext In CH 1 : Reverb Send C 2 (0-127) 2
FX Ext In CH 1 : Pan D 2 (0-127) 3
FX Ext In CH 1 : Level E 2 (0-127) 4
FX Ext In CH 2 : Chorus Send F 2 (0-127) 5
FX Ext In CH 2 : Delay Send G 2 (0-127) 6
FX Ext In CH 2 : Reverb Send H 2 (0-127) 7
FX Ext In CH 2 : Pan I 2 (0-127) 8
FX Ext In CH 2 : Level J 2 (0-127) 9

10 MIDI & USB
FX Chorus Chorus : Pre-delay A 2 (0-127) 40
FX Chorus Chorus : Speed B 2 (0-127) 41
FX Chorus Chorus : Depth C 2 (0-127) 42
FX Chorus Chorus : Width D 2 (0-127) 43
FX Chorus Chorus : Feedback E 2 (0-127) 44
FX Chorus Chorus : HP Filter F 2 (0-127) 45
FX Chorus Chorus : LP Filter G 2 (0-127) 46
FX Chorus Chorus : Delay Send H 2 (0-127) 47
FX Chorus Chorus : Reverb Send I 2 (0-127) 48
FX Chorus Chorus : Send Level J 2 (0-127) 49
FX Delay Delay : Time A 2 (0-127) 50
FX Delay Delay : Mode B 2 (0-127) 51
FX Delay C 2 (0-127) 52
FX Delay Delay : Width D 2 (0-127) 53
FX Delay Delay : Feedback E 2 (0-127) 54
FX Delay Delay : HP Filter F 2 (0-127) 55
FX Delay Delay : LP Filter G 2 (0-127) 56
FX Delay Delay : Overdrive H 2 (0-127) 57
FX Delay Delay : Reverb Send I 2 (0-127) 58
FX Delay Delay : Send Level J 2 (0-127) 59
FX Reverb Reverb : Pre-delay A 2 (0-127) 60
FX Reverb Reverb : Decay Time B 2 (0-127) 61
FX Reverb Reverb : Shelving Freq C 2 (0-127) 62
FX Reverb Reverb : Shelving Gain D 2 (0-127) 63
FX Reverb E 2 (0-127) 64
FX Reverb Reverb : HP Filter F 2 (0-127) 65
FX Reverb Reverb : LP Filter G 2 (0-127) 66
FX Reverb H 2 (0-127) 67
FX Reverb I 2 (0-127) 68
FX Reverb Reverb: Send Level J 2 (0-127) 69
FX LFO LFO 1 : Speed A 2 (0-127) 80
FX LFO LFO 1 : Speed Multiplier B 2 (0-127) 81
FX LFO LFO 1 : Fade C 2 (0-127) 82
FX LFO LFO 1 : Start Phase D 2 (0-127) 83
FX LFO LFO 1 : Mode E 2 (0-127) 84
FX LFO LFO 1 : Waveform F 2 (0-127) 85
FX LFO LFO 1: Destination A G 2 (0-127) 86
FX LFO LFO 1 : Depth A H 2 (0-127) 87 (0-127)
FX LFO LFO 1 : Destination B I 2 (0-127) 88
FX LFO LFO 1 : Depth B J 2 (0-127) 89 (0-127)

MIDI & USB 10
FX LFO LFO 2 : Fade C 2 (0-127) 92
FX LFO LFO 2 : Mode E 2 (0-127) 94
FX LFO LFO 2 : Destination A G 2 (0-127) 96
FX LFO LFO 2 : Depth A H 2 (0-127) 97 (0-127)
FX LFO LFO 2 : Destination B I 2 (0-127) 98
FX LFO LFO 2 : Depth B J 2 (0-127) 99 (0-127)
Performance Parameter A A 3 (0-127) 0 0 (0-127)
Performance Parameter B B 4 (0-127) 0 1 (0-127)
Performance Parameter C C 8 (0-127) 0 2 (0-127)
Performance Parameter D D 9 (0-127) 0 3 (0-127)
Performance Parameter E E 11 (0-127) 0 4 (0-127)
Performance Parameter F F 64 (0-127) 0 5 (0-127)
Performance Parameter G G 65 (0-127) 0 6 (0-127)
Performance Parameter H H 66 (0-127) 0 7 (0-127)
Performance Parameter I I 67 (0-127) 0 8 (0-127)
Performance Parameter J J 68 (0-127) 0 9 (0-127)
Modulation Mod Wheel 1 (0-127) 33 (0-127)
Modulation Breathe Controller 2 (0-127) 34 (0-127)
Common Track Level 95 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 100
Track Channel Track Mute (0 = Track Muted) 94 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 101

10 MIDI & USB
CV Track CV A : Coarse Tune A 3 (0-127) 0
CV Track CV A : Fine Tune B 3 (0-127) 1
CV Track CV A : Value C 3 (0-127) 2
CV Track CV A : Clock D 3 (0-127) 3
CV Track CV A : Source E 3 (0-127) 4
CV Track CV A : Bend Depth F 3 (0-127) 5
CV Track CV A : Note Slide Time G 3 (0-127) 6
CV Track H 3 (0-127)
CV Track I 3 (0-127)
CV Track J 3 (0-127)
CV Track CV B : Coarse Tune A 3 (0-127) 20
CV Track CV B : Fine Tune B 3 (0-127) 21
CV Track CV B : Value C 3 (0-127) 22
CV Track CV B : Clock D 3 (0-127) 23
CV Track CV B : Source E 3 (0-127) 24
CV Track CV B : Bend Depth F 3 (0-127) 25
CV Track CV B : Note Slide Time G 3 (0-127) 26
CV Track CV C : Coarse Tune A 3 (0-127) 40
CV Track CV C : Fine Tune B 3 (0-127) 41
CV Track CV C : Value C 3 (0-127) 42
CV Track CV C : Clock D 3 (0-127) 43
CV Track CV C : Source E 3 (0-127) 44
CV Track CV C : Bend Depth F 3 (0-127) 45
CV Track CV C : Note Slide Time G 3 (0-127) 46
CV Track CV D : Coarse Tune A 3 (0-127) 50
CV Track CV D : Fine Tune B 3 (0-127) 51
CV Track CV D : Value C 3 (0-127) 52
CV Track CV D : Clock D 3 (0-127) 53
CV Track CV D : Source E 3 (0-127) 54
CV Track CV D : Bend Depth F 3 (0-127) 55
CV Track CV D : Note Slide Time G 3 (0-127) 56

MIDI & USB 10
CV Envelope Env1 : Attack Time A 3 (0-127) 60
CV Envelope Env1 : Decay Time B 3 (0-127) 61
CV Envelope Env1 : Sustain Level C 3 (0-127) 62
CV Envelope Env1 : Release Time D 3 (0-127) 63
CV Envelope Env1 : Envelope Shape E 3 (0-127) 64
CV Envelope Env1 : Gate Length F 3 (0-127) 65
CV Envelope Env1 : Destination 1 G 3 (0-127) 66
CV Envelope Env1 : Depth 1 H 3 (0-127) 67 (0-127)
CV Envelope Env1 : Destination 2 I 3 (0-127) 68
CV Envelope Env1 : Depth 2 J 3 (0-127) 69 (0-127)
CV LFO LFO 1 : Speed A 3 (0-127) 80
CV LFO LFO 1 : Speed Multiplier B 3 (0-127) 81
CV LFO LFO 1 : Fade C 3 (0-127) 82
CV LFO LFO 1 : Start Phase D 3 (0-127) 83
CV LFO LFO 1 : Mode E 3 (0-127) 84
CV LFO LFO 1 : Waveform F 3 (0-127) 85
CV LFO LFO 1 : Destination 1 G 3 (0-127) 86
CV LFO LFO 1 : Depth 1 H 3 (0-127) 87 (0-127)
CV LFO LFO 1 : Destination 2 I 3 (0-127) 88
CV LFO LFO 1 : Depth 2 J 3 (0-127) 89 (0-127)
CV LFO LFO 2 : Fade C 3 (0-127) 92
CV LFO LFO 2 : Mode E 3 (0-127) 94
CV LFO LFO 2 : Destination 1 G 3 (0-127) 96
CV LFO LFO 2 : Depth 1 H 3 (0-127) 97 (0-127)
CV LFO LFO 2 : Destination 2 I 3 (0-127) 98
CV LFO LFO 2 : Depth 2 J 3 (0-127) 99 (0-127)

10 MIDI & USB
10.6 MIDI Gear Examples NOTES
MIDI Out to Analog Four from Arturia Keystep using 5 Pin MIDI.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
5 Pin MIDI
The MIDI Control from the Keystep will play the Analog Four notes on the matched up track MIDI
channel. The transport controls from Keystep will operate the stop, play and pause functions on the
Analog Four sequencer but remember that keystep has internal sequencer and arp that would be
triggered too. Clock setting and hence tempo of the Analog Four can be controlled from keystep when
sequence is running. Notes can be recorded using live recording.
Analog Four Value Keystep Value

Sync: Clock Receive ON Sync Dip Switches (rear) Internal
Sync: Transport Receive ON
Port Config: Input From MIDI
Port Config: Receive Notes ON
Channels: Track 1 1 Set to same to control Track 1 1
Channels: Track FX 5 Set to same to control Track 5 5
Channels: Track CV 6 Set to same to control Track 6 6
Channels: Auto 9 Set to same to control active track 9

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES 10.6 MIDI Gear Examples (cont)
MIDI Out to Analog Four from Digitakt using 5 Pin Midi.
5 Pin MIDI IN 5 Pin MIDI OUT

5 Pin MIDI OUT 5 Pin MIDI IN
Audio In Audio Out
The MIDI control master will be from the Digitakt which will control the Analog Four as the slave.
Controlling transport on the Digitakt will operate Analog Four and the tempo will also be
synchronised together with Analog Four following the Digitakt BPM.
The Digitakt MIDI Tracks A-H will control Analog Four Synth Tracks 1-4 respectively. Sequences
configured on the Digitakt will then control the four synth tracks, while the Digitakt Sampler tracks
1-8 can provide a synchronised accompanying sequence. MIDI Tracks on Digitakt should be set up
in the SRC page.
Audio can be routed through the Analog Four FX Channel and be the master out for both devices.
Also effects can be introduced from the Analog Four to the Digitakt audio. The FX Track Audio L/R
Volume and external in parameters should be set accordingly.
Program changes can be made on the Digitakt which change programs on the Analog Four. Auto
Channel is an important setting and prog change send and receive in the MIDI Sync settings.
Ensure SRC parameters match AUTO channel and PROG Change is on. To create pattern
changes on the Analog Four, a sequence of trigs with program changes (1 = A01 - 128 = H16)
would need to be created for Auto Channel (eg 9).
LOCK TRIG
Triggers on Digitakt SRC Page PROG for a pattern
change on the Analog Four at the start sequence using
DIGITAKT
parameter locks can be set up
1
AO1
2
AO2
ANALOG FOUR
122.O TRIGS
Triggers notes on the Analog Four from the Digitakt
TRIG page settings

10 MIDI & USB
NOTES
MIDI Out to Analog Four from Digitakt using 5 Pin Midi. (Cont)
Analog Four Value Digitakt Value

Sync: Clock Send OFF Sync: Clock Receive OFF
Sync: Clock Receive ON Sync: Clock Send ON
Sync: Transport Receive ON
Sync: Transport Send OFF
Sync: Prog Ch Receive ON Sync: Prog Ch Send ON
Sync: Prog Ch Send OFF Sync: Prog Ch Receive OFF
Port Config: Turbo Speed* ON Port Config: Turbo Speed* ON
Port Config: Input From MIDI Port Config: Output To MIDI
Port Config: Receive Notes ON
Channels: Track 1 1 Channels: Track A 1
Channels: Track 2 2 Channels: Track B 2
Channels: Track 3 3 Channels: Track C 3
Channels: Track 4 4 Channels: Track D 4
Channels: Track FX 5 Channels: Track 1-8 10
Channels: Track CV 6
Channels: Auto 9 Channels: Auto 9
* If MIDI In/Out’s are both connected between compatible devices
PROG Setting (D) on Digitakt SRC Page will set the Program Changes. Channel should match AUTO channel.

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES 10.7 Sysex
MIDI communication is used with the 5 Pin Midi Out or USB ports in order
to send / receive data and manage back ups using Sysex protocols. C6 is
the a legacy Elektron PC/MAC utility recommended for sysex. The PC/Mac
would need to have a compatible OS and need to be connected to Analog
Four to operate the following walkthroughs.
C6
C6 utility shows transferred files.
The larger one is entire project and
smaller is an individual pattern.
Files can be saved to the PC / MAC
from here.
ANALOG FOUR PC / MAC
Ensure MIDI CONFIG in the settings Use a Sysex Tool for transferring data.
menu is set correctly as per your physical Elektron recommend the free C6 utility
connection i.e. USB. available from the Elektron site.
SYSEX SEND SYSEX RECEIVE
Sysex will transfer kits, sounds, patterns, Sysex will transfer kits, sounds, patterns,
songs and global slot data. songs and global slot data.
ALL WHOLE PROJECT ANYTHING RECEIVE ANY

KIT ALL SOUNDS KIT
SOUND ALL KITS SOUND POOL
PATTERN ALL PATTERNS +DRIVE SOUND
PATTERN+KIT ALL SONGS PATTERN
SONG ALL GLOBALS SONG
GLOBAL ALL SETTINGS GLOBAL

10 MIDI & USB
NOTES
▌SEND DATA FROM ANALOG FOUR TO MAC / PC
1. Connect the PC or Mac with the C6 utility to the Analog Four with a USB
cable
2. Press Global [GLOBAL SETTINGS] MkII and Keyboard [C2] MkI key for
GLOBAL SETTINGS
3. Highlight [SYSEX DUMP] menu by scrolling with (TRACK LEVEL) or

[UP] [DOWN]
4. Press [YES] to select SYSEX DUMP and to open its sub menu
5. Scroll to and Highlight SYSEX SEND and Press [YES] to select
6. Open C6 on the Mac or PC. Select RECEIVE in the Top Menu.
7. In Analog Four, navigate using [UP] [DOWN] to the required option to

send. If selecting ALL then the sub menu [RIGHT] accesses the list of
specific data to back up i.e. All Patterns
8. Press [YES] to select and sending starts.
9. C6 will indicate the bytes transferred and received. Analog Four will
indicate ‘sending’ and will complete when data transfer has finished.
10. Press Stop on the Mac / PC C6 menu and the data will be shown in the
files window.
11. Select the transferred files in C6 and SAVE. This will allow the data to
be saved and named on the PC / MAC Drive.

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES
▌RECEIVE DATA TO ANALOG FOUR FROM MAC / PC
1. Connect the PC or Mac with the C6 utility to the Analog Four with a USB
cable.
2. Select GLOBAL Settings, press [GLOBAL SETTINGS] MkII and

KEYBOARD [C2] MkI.
3. Highlight [SYSEX DUMP] page by scrolling with (TRACK LEVEL) or

[UP] [DOWN].
4. Press [YES] to select SYSEX DUMP and open the sub menu.
5. Scroll to and Highlight SYSEX RECEIVE and Press [YES] to select.
6. In Analog Four, navigate using [UP] [DOWN] to the required option to

receive. If selecting ANYTHING then the sub menu [RIGHT] accesses
the list of specific data to transfer.
7. Press [YES] to select and waits to receive.
8. Select the files to transfer in C6 and press SEND. This will allow the
data to be sent from the PC / MAC Drive.
9. C6 will indicate the bytes transferred. Analog Four will complete when
data transfer has finished.
Transfer is an Elektron utility also for managing Sysex activities. At the time of
writing Transfer only provides management of sample based data with devices
such as Digitakt. The ‘explore’ page is not available with Analog Four. It is expected
that a future version of Transfer will accommodate sound based files. The Analog
Four OS can be updated using the Transfer drop page.

10 MIDI & USB
10.8 USB WITH LOGIC PRO X NOTES
Logic examples are shown to illustrate the range of options USB MIDI and
Audio (MKII) provides. These are for example and illustration purposes only
and other methods may be applied. Hardware and software versions may
vary and evolve and the exact functionality may change.
Logic Pro X 10.6.1 to Analog Four 1.50b
Connectivity
A Logic audio track can be set up to receive the Analog Four MKII audio in via USB. Individual
‘External MIDI Instrument’ tracks can be set, for example one logic track to each Analog Four track.
Individual control of Analog Four is then possible. Audio from the Analog Four USB will be available
in the Logic MIDI Instrument plug in or audio track as a stereo 1-2 pair or 1 or 2 inputs in the audio
track.
Mac / Macbook’s typically have either a USB Type A or Type C connection. A compatible cable is
needed for connection to the Analog Four USB - Type B connector. Analog Four is supplied with a
Type A to Type B Cable.
SETTINGS
Analog Four Config Parameter Setting Description

System > USB Config USB Audio / MIDI ON Enable MIDI and Audio over USB to Logic.
If the Analog Four sequencer and tempo is
MIDI Config > Sync Clock Receive ON
to be synchronised from Logic
If the sequencer and tempo is to be
MIDI Config > Sync Clock Send ON
synchronised in Logic from Analog Four
MIDI Config > Sync Transport Receive ON Stop, Start control Analog Four from Logic
MIDI Config > Sync Transport Send ON Stop, Start control Logic from Analog Four
Internal Analog Four audio not routed to
System > Audio Routing Int to Main OFF main output. Set ON if the internal audio is
required to be output.
Sets the gain of any USB audio coming in
System > Audio Routing USB to Main (dB) 0
to Analog Four at the main output
Other settings are suggested to remain at the defaults.

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES
▌AUDIO INTO LOGIC PRO X FROM ANALOG FOUR USB.
1. Connect the Analog Four to the Mac hosting Logic Pro X DAW.
2. Ensure Analog Four SETTINGS are configured for USB MIDI and
Audio.
3. In Logic, setup the audio preferences. Menu: Logic Pro X > Preferences
> Audio. This opens the audio set up window. Set ‘Elektron Analog Four’
as the input device (option also for output device). This may also be
automatically set when connecting the device.
4. In Logic, add a new track. Select ‘+’ in the track window and the track
selection window opens. Ensure the ‘detail’ drop down is open.
5. Select the ‘Audio’ track option.
6. Ensure ‘Elektron Analog Four’ is shown in the window as the selected

device. Use the > option to select the audio preference window to
change if necessary.
7. Select the Audio Input - Typically ‘Input 1 + 2’ for the stereo output from
the Analog Four. Audio output is the DAW output channels.
8. Analog Four audio can be monitored on the audio track created.
9. The audio track can be record enabled and audio recorded in from
Logic when playing Analog Four.
▌TRANSPORT CONTROL FROM LOGIC TO ANALOG FOUR VIA USB.
2. Ensure Analog Four SETTINGS are configured for MIDI Config > Sync
to: Transport Receive = ON / Checked. Clock Receive and Send and
Transport Send can also be checked as options if needed.
3. In Logic, setup the MIDI preferences. Menu: Logic Pro X > Preferences
> MIDI then ‘Sync’ Tab. This opens the MIDI set up window.
4. In the ‘Sync’ window, Open the ‘MIDI Sync Project Settings...’ Option.
5. Select the destination ‘All’ or select ‘Elektron Analog Four’ as the

destination. Check the ‘Clock’ option. Close the windows.
6. The transport in Logic will control Analog Four transport Play and Stop.

10 MIDI & USB
NOTES
▌EXTERNAL MIDI CONTROL FROM LOGIC WITH ANALOG FOUR USB.
Audio.
3. In Logic, setup the audio preferences. Menu: Logic Pro X > Preferences
> Audio. This opens the audio set up window. Set ‘Elektron Analog Four’
as the input device (option also for output device). This may also be
automatically set when connecting the device.
4. In Logic, add a new track. Select ‘+’ in the track window and the track
selection window opens. Ensure the ‘detail’ drop down is open.
5. Select the ‘Use External MIDI Instrument Plug-In’ checkbox in the

external MIDI page.
6. Ensure ‘Elektron Analog Four’ is shown in the window as the selected

device. Use the > option to select the audio preference window to
change if necessary.
7. Select the Audio Input - Typically ‘Input 1 + 2’ for the stereo output from
the Analog Four. Audio Output is the DAW output channels.
8. Select MIDI Destination. This will be the track controlled by MIDI from
Logic. By default, Logic Channel 1 = Track 1 in Analog Four - Trk 1,
Channel 2 = Trk 2.
9. Audio will be picked up in each Logic track which of course will be the
Analog Four output 1-2 and not individual audio per Analog Four track.
Analog Four sends on the two audio 1 and 2 channels. Therefore it is
recommended to create a separate Logic audio track to record the
stereo or mono inputs.
A4 Audio
1 M S R I L R
A4 Track 1 Ch1
2 M S R L R
A4 Track 2 Ch2
3 M S R L R

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES 10.9 USB WITH ABLETON LIVE.
Ableton Live examples illustrate the options USB MIDI and Audio provides.
These are for example and illustration purposes only and other methods
may be applied. Hardware and software versions may vary and evolve and
the exact functionality may change.
Live 9 to Analog Four 1.50b
Connectivity
A Live audio track can be set up to receive the Analog Four audio in via USB. Individual MIDI tracks
can be set, for example one Live track to each Analog Four track. Individual control of Analog Four
tracks is then possible. Audio from the Analog Four USB will be available in the Live audio tracks
as a stereo 1-2 pair or 1 or 2 inputs in the audio track.
Mac or Windows PC’s normally have a USB Type A or Type C. A compatible cable is needed for
connection to the Analog Four USB - Type B connection. Analog Four is supplied with a Type A to
Type B Cable.
SETTINGS
Analog Four Config Parameter Setting Description

System > USB Config USB Audio / MIDI ON Enable MIDI and Audio over USB to Live.
MIDI Config > Sync Clock Receive ON
synchronised in the Analog Four from Live
MIDI Config > Sync Clock Send ON
synchronised in the Live from Analog Four
MIDI Config > Sync Transport Receive ON Stop, Start control of Analog Four from Live
MIDI Config > Sync Transport Send ON Stop, Start control of Live from Analog Four
Internal Analog Four audio not routed to
System > Audio Routing Int to Main OFF main output. Set ON if the internal audio is
required.
Sets the gain of any USB audio to the
System > Audio Routing USB to Main (dB) 0
Analog Four main output
Other settings are suggested to remain at the defaults.

10 MIDI & USB
NOTES
▌AUDIO INTO LIVE FROM ANALOG FOUR USB.
1. Connect the Analog Four to the Mac hosting Live DAW.
Audio.
3. In Live, setup the audio preferences. Menu: Live > Preferences > Audio.
This opens the audio set up window. Set ‘Elektron Analog Four (2 in, 2
out)’ as the analogue input device (option also for output device).
4. In Live, insert a new audio track or select an existing free audio track.
5. Ensure the audio track ‘Audio From’ is set to Ext In and to the input
channels required. This is typically 1/2 for the Analog Four stereo output
but can also be 1 or 2 for each individual channel.
6. Select ‘In’ on the audio track to monitor the Analog Four audio signal.
7. The audio track can be record enabled and audio recorded into a clip
within Live when Analog Four is playing.
▌TRANSPORT CONTROL FROM LIVE TO ANALOG FOUR VIA USB.
1. Connect the Analog Four to the Mac hosting Live DAW.
Transport Send can also be checked as options if needed.
3. In Live, setup the link MIDI preferences. Menu: Live > Preferences then
‘Link MIDI’ Tab. This opens the Link MIDI set up window.
4. In the ‘MIDI Ports’ Section, Set the ‘Output: Elektron Analog Four’, Sync
setting to ON.
5. The transport for Analog Four is controlled by Live’s play and stop.
Tempo is also synchronised if Analog Four Clock Receive is on in the
MIDI Config > Sync options.

MIDI & USB 10
NOTES
▌SETTING UP A LIVE MIDI TRACK TO CONTROL ANALOG FOUR
1. Connect the Analog Four to the Mac hosting Live
Transport Send also be checked.
3. In Live, setup the Link MIDI preferences. Menu: Live > Preferences then
‘Link MIDI’ Tab. This opens the Link MIDI set up window.
4. In the ‘MIDI Ports’ Section, Set the ‘Output: Elektron Analog Four’, Sync
setting to ON and also Track setting to ON.
5. Create a MIDI Track in Live.
6. Set the MIDI track ‘MIDI To’ to ‘Elektron Analog Four’ and also to the
desired Channel, i.e. Channel 1 to control Kick - Track 1 on Analog Four
(with default settings).
7. This will send the data from clips and devices in the MIDI track to the
defined channel. Additional tracks can be configured for Analog Four
Track 1, Track 2 etc.
1 MIDI Trk1 2 A4 Audio
MIDI From Audio From

All Ins Ext. In
All Channels 1/2
Monitor Monitor
In Auto Off In Auto Off
MIDI To Audio To
Elektron Analog Four Master
Ch. 1
Sends
A
B
-4.30
0
12
24
1 2
36
s s 48
60

NOTES

11
CV Functions
The 6th Track in the Analog Four is the CV track. addition of two inputs for CV In 1 - Control 1 /
This allows setup and connection between CV Expression and CV In 2 - Control 2 / Expression.
compatible devices and the Analog Four. CV is Remember that when using external hardware
a classic legacy technology used in the 1970’s the audio can also be looped into and through
prior to the development of the MIDI standards. the Analog Four taking advantage of the
This uses a gate signal to trigger a note or modulation, filters and effects. These work in the
event followed by a CV - Control Voltage value same way as the synth tracks and are detailed in
to control the note pitch or value of the the modulation section of this notebook. Using
destination parameter. While older classic CV and the internal audio to the Analog Four is a
synths use CV technology, there has been a great system option. Care should be taken when
resurgence with new devices and modular working with CV. Always ensure that the correct
equipment in using CV over the past few years. match up of devices and settings plus any CV
This not only to maintain compatibility with and triggers is correct in order to avoid any
classic gear but brings more interesting damage to equipment.
possibilities and a whole new dimension to
integrating synths, controllers and modular
systems. The whole shift of analog to being
back en vogue has brought CV technology
back to the fore. The Analog Four CV Track
also has 2 LFO’s and 2 ADSR Envelopes.
Analog Four MkII differs from MkI with the

11 CV Functions
11.1 CV on MkI Analog Four MK I NOTES
The MkI model Analog Four has 2 CV Outputs representing AB and CD CV

signals. There is no direct CV input capability. Stereo phono jack plugs can
access the CV AB or CD outputs using the plugs tip and ring.
Tip (left)
Ring (right)
6.35mm (1/4inch) Stereo Phono TRS
Sleeve
(Tip, Ring, Sleeve) plug.
Tip and Ring are assigned to the CV / Gate

on a single output as indicated on the display.
3.5mm Mono Phono plug or other audio

plug compatible with external gear.
Each plug would represent either the CV

output (typically white - left) or the Gate
output (typically red - right).
The example given above is a typical standard cable configuration. Elektron do supply an official CV
cable connection kit. Actual cable settings and configuration shown may vary depending on the cable,
connector and adapter types used. The plug configuration will be shown on the Analog Four MkI
display. The tip or ring on the plug graphic will flash on the parameter display to indicate whether the
tip or ring on the CV plug will transmit the configured CV/Gate signal.
CV CONNECTOR CV GATE
Analog Four MkI uses 6.35mm CV Means ‘Control Voltage’ and Gate is a control signal which
(¼ inch) phono plugs for was created as an analogue normally accompanies CV
connecting CV. The connections control between devices prior to control settings. Where CV
also act as the interface for an the introduction of MIDI in the controls pitch, Gate controls the
expression pedal. Many other early 1980’s. The parameter note on and off signals.
devices use 3.5mm connectors typically controlled is pitch Sometimes gate is also called
for CV control and these cables although other parameters can trigger. Typically gate signals
are common. An Adaptor from be controlled especially within trigger an ADSR envelope but
3.5mm to 6.35mm may be modular setups. MkI only has 2 also clock and other functions
needed physical CV inputs such as an LFO.

CV Functions 11
NOTES 11.2 CV on MkII Analog Four MK II
The MkI model Analog Four has 4 CV Outputs representing A, B, C

and D CV signals. There are also 2 direct CV inputs. Mono phono
jack plugs can access the I/O.
6.35mm (1/4inch) Mono

Phono plug.
3.5mm Mono Phono plug or

other audio plug compatible
with external gear.
The example given above is a typical standard cable configuration. Elektron do supply an official CV
cable connection kit. Actual cable settings and configuration shown may vary depending on the cable,
connector and adapter types used. Direct expression pedal or CV inputs are available on the Analog
Four MkII.
CV CONNECTOR CV GATE
Analog Four uses 6.35mm (¼ CV Means ‘Control Voltage’ Gate is a control signal which
inch) mono phono plugs for and was created to as an normally accompanies CV
connecting the CV output. analogue control between control settings. Where CV
The stereo input connections devices prior to the controls pitch, Gate controls
can be connected to external introduction of MIDI in the the note on and off signals.
CV gear or an expression early 1980’s. The parameter Sometimes gate is also called
pedal. Many other devices typically controlled is pitch. trigger. Typically gate signals
use 3.5mm connectors for MkII has 4 physical direct CV trigger an ADSR envelope but
CV control. outputs and 2 inputs also clock and other functions
such as an LFO

11 CV Functions
11.3 CV Configuration & Tracks NOTES
CV is initial set up within the Analog Four GLOBAL CV Config page. This is
where calibration and ranges are set. The CV Track parameters are
available when in the CV track and selecting the relevant page.
CV Track parameter settings CV Envelope &

for each CV output. LFO Pages
General CV calibration, trim

and type settings in the
GLOBAL SETTINGS Menu
The CV configuration sub menus are directly accessible using [FUNC] + [CV A], [CV B], [CV C]
or [CV D] when in the CV track.
▌ACCESSING CV TRACK PAGES
1. Press TRACK [CV], Track 6 to select the CV track.
2. Press the [CV A], [CV B], [CV C] or [CV D] when in the CV track to
select the relevant set up page.
3. The physical ports for MkI are shared AB and CD while the MkII has 4
physical individual ports.

CV Functions 11
NOTES
CV configuration is found in the GLOBAL SETTINGS menu. This is where

the control voltage and gate are calibration and configured for CV A-D. The
Mk II has 4 physical CV outputs and MkI has 2 (A/B and C/D).
1. CV CONFIG: There is an identical configuration page for CV A, B, C

and D. These sub menus are directly accessible using [FUNC] + [CV A],
[CV B], [CV C] or [CV D] when in the CV track.
2. VOLTAGE TRIM: Enables the trimming of the analogue output voltage

to a more precise value and also to compensate for any errors in
calibration between different gear.
GLOBAL SETTINGS
CV CONFIG
CV A CONFIG
CV B CONFIG
CV C CONFIG
CV D CONFIG
VOLTAGE TRIM
▌ACCESSING CV SETTINGS

for GLOBAL on the MkI.
2. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight CV

CONFIG.
3. Press [YES] to select sub menu to select and open the CV CONFIG
menu or [NO] to cancel.

11 CV Functions
Global Settings > CV CONFIG Options

CV Config Page Parameter Description
Type of signal for the output: Grounded, Pitch V/Oct, Pitch Hz/V, Value Lin,
CV A Config Type
Trig, Gate , Clock (additional parameters are available depending on selection)
CV A (V/Oct or Hz/V) Note 1 First note (point of calibration) that will play at Voltage 1 (V/Oct or Hz/V)
CV A (V/Oct or Hz/V) Voltage 1 Voltage output level set that plays Note 1 on the connected device
CV A (V/Oct or Hz/V) Note 2 Second note (point of calibration) that will play at Voltage 2
CV A (V/Oct or Hz/V) Voltage 2 Voltage output level set that plays Note 2 on the connected device
CV A (Val Lin) Min Minimum Voltage level Output e.g. 0V
CV A (Val Lin) Max Maximum Voltage level Output e.g.5V
CV A (Trig) Length Length of trigger signals output
CV A (Trig) Polarity V-Trig ad S-Trig Polarity
CV A (Trig) Level Voltage level to trigger outputs, 5V is a typical level but is device dependant
CV A (Gate) Polarity S-Trig and S-Trig. Polarity of output.
CV A (Gate) Level Voltage level to trigger outputs, 5V is a typical level but is device dependant
CV A (Clock) Length Length of Pulse
CV A (Clock) Polarity S-Trig and S-Trig. Polarity of output
CV A (Clock) Level Voltage level to trigger outputs, 5V is a typical level but is device dependant
CV B Config All parameters are same as those for CV A indicated above
CV C Config All parameters are same as those for CV A indicated above
CV D Config All parameters are same as those for CV A indicated above
Voltage Trim CH A (T) 0.0V Channel A: First of 3 Trim settings for the 0V point
Voltage Trim CH A (T) 8.0V (1) Channel A: Second of 3 Trim settings for the 8V point - Continuous
Voltage Trim CH A (T) 8.0V (2) Channel A: Third of 3 Trim settings for the 8V point - Pulse
Voltage Trim CH B (T) 0.0V Channel B: First of 3 Trim settings for the 0V point
Voltage Trim CH B (T) 8.0V (1) Channel B: Second of 3 Trim settings for the 8V point - Continuous
Voltage Trim CH B (T) 8.0V (2) Channel B: Third of 3 Trim settings for the 8V point - Pulse
Voltage Trim CH C (T) 0.0V Channel C: First of 3 Trim settings for the 0V point
Voltage Trim CH C (T) 8.0V (1) Channel C: Second of 3 Trim settings for the 8V point - Continuous
Voltage Trim CH C (T) 8.0V (2) Channel C: Third of 3 Trim settings for the 8V point - Pulse
Voltage Trim CH D (T) 0.0V Channel D: First of 3 Trim settings for the 0V point
Voltage Trim CH D (T) 8.0V (1) Channel D: Second of 3 Trim settings for the 8V point - Continuous
Voltage Trim CH D (T) 8.0V (2) Channel D: Third of 3 Trim settings for the 8V point - Pulse
Setting trim and the note voltages would be an iterative process as changing trim would change the reference voltage and hence shift
the note calibration.

CV Functions 11
NOTES 11.4 Setting The CV Type
▌CHANGING CV TYPE SETTINGS


CONFIG.
3. Press [YES] to select CV CONFIG or [NO] to cancel.

Channel to configure.
5. Press [YES] to select channel configuration sub menu or [NO] to

cancel.
6. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight TYPE.
7. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change TYPE setting.
TYPE OPTIONS
Type options along with the parameter page and data entry control options
Grounded
5
Effectively this sets CV output to OFF.
4
Volts
3
GND 2
1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
Pitch
The CV configuration sub menus are directly accessible using [FUNC] + [CV A], [CV B], [CV C]
or [CV D] when in the CV track.

11 CV Functions
Pitch V/Oct V/Oct - 1 Volt per Octave

Note: Frequency to perception of pitch is logarithmic
5
Traditional Pitch 1 Volt per Octave. The most
common standard found with synthesizers. 4
Volts
3
2
V/OCT
1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
55Hz 110Hz 220Hz Pitch 440Hz 880Hz
A TUN B FIN C BND D SLI E TRK - SRC
Course tuning of the CV in Course tuning of the CV Bend depth. The higher the Note slide time. Sets the Source track to send to CV.
semitones setting the more it will note slide time for CV This can be any synth track
affect pitch. 1-4, FX track or CV track.
MK I The plug configuration will be shown on the Analog Four MkI display. The plug graphic will flash on the parameter display
to indicate whether the tip or ring on the CV plug will transmit the CV/Gate signal.
Pitch Hz/Volt Hz/V - 55Hz/V

Note: Frequency to perception of pitch is logarithmic
16
Less common standard used by Korg and Yamaha
and operates with a Pitch Frequency (Hz) per Volt 8
model.
Volts
2
HZ/V
1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
55Hz 110Hz 220Hz 440Hz 880Hz
Pitch
A TUN B FIN C BND D SLI E TRK - SRC
Course tuning of the CV in Course tuning of the CV Bend depth. The higher the Note slide time. Sets the Source track to send to CV.
semitones setting the more it will note slide time for CV This can be any synth track
affect pitch. 1-4, FX track or CV track.

CV Functions 11
Value Lin
VAL LIN
Val Max
Used on a linear scale to send arbitrary values out.
The parameters within the CV config setting in the
GLOBAL menu for Value Lin are where the VALUE
MIN and VALUE MAX range are set. Range is
Volts
typically between +/-15v.
VAL LIN
Val Min
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
55Hz 110Hz 220Hz Pitch 440Hz 880Hz
C VAL
Sets the CV Output value.

Ideal creative option when
parameter locked.
Trig
Sends out short trigger pulses at the start of a note +5

V-Trig
on. The GLOBAL CV Config parameters include (0 to +5V)
LENGTH of the pulse transmitted. The voltage
LEVEL. The common voltage level is +5V as per
Volts
example but this depends on the receiving device. Level

POLARITY is between the V-Trig and S.Trig options.
Length
TRIG S-Trig
(+5V to 0V)
0
TRIG
E TRK - SRC
Track used as the source to

send to CV. This can be any
synth track 1-4, FX track or
CV track.

11 CV Functions
Gate
Note On Note On
+5
Sends out a pulse, held for the whole note duration. at V-Trig
(0 to +5V)
the start of a note on. The GLOBAL CV Config
parameters includes the voltage LEVEL. The common
voltage level is +5V as per example but this depends on
Volts
Level
the receiving device. POLARITY is between the V-Trig
and S.Trig options.
GATE S-Trig
(+5V to 0V)
0
GATE
E TRK - SRC
Track used as the source to

send to CV. This can be any
synth track 1-4, FX track or
CV track.
Clock Time
+5
Sends out a pulses which are synchronised with the Pulses Synchronised to
sequencer tempo and step length. CLK sets the sequencer and step
tempo divider of the clock pulses. length
Volts
CLK
0
CLOCK
D CLK
Clock Division. Sets the clock

division with respect to the
sequencer tempo beats per
minute.

CV Functions 11
11.5 Setting Up CV Output - Workflow
Hardware Calibration / Voltage Trim should only be performed when needed and with a good understanding of the process
HARDWARE S CV SETTINGS
Select CV Track 6
Connect the Analog Four CV output to

External Device CV Input 1
eg 2 Outputs, Gate CV A and CV Voltage CV C
Set a Gate Trigger output for external device envelope
2 Select [GLOBAL SETTINGS] > CV Config > CV A Config > Type = Gate*
CV Track Page > Parameter TRK or SRC = CV
*Other Trigger types available which include Trig and Clock
Set Trigs on Sequencer

3 Trig Locks can trigger an output or by playing the keyboard. Gate will trigger
for duration of note
C Set the CV Voltage ‘Type’

4 Select [GLOBAL SETTINGS] > CV Config > CV C Config > Type = V/Oct**
**Type Should be set to match the target device standard. Others

available include Hz/Vol and Value Lin.
When calibrating use a tuner

Use a tuner or a reference (piano note) on the 5
external device’s audio output. Adjust voltages to
tune to the selected Note 1 and 2.
Calibrate the First Note for the CV Output

6 Select [GLOBAL SETTINGS] > CV Config > CV C Config > Note 1 = eg C1
Calibrate the First Note Voltage for the CV Output

X 7 Select [GLOBAL SETTINGS] > CV Config > CV C Config > Voltage 1
Use ***[YES] + [LEFT] or [RIGHT] to tune the voltage to match note eg C1
V
X Calibrate the Second Note for the CV Output

8 Select [GLOBAL SETTINGS] > CV Config > CV C Config > Note 1 = eg C4
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
Select Notes 2-3 Octaves apart for calibration Calibrate the Second Note Voltage for the CV Output
9 Select [GLOBAL SETTINGS] > CV Config > CV C Config > Voltage 2
Use ***[YES] + [LEFT] or [RIGHT] to tune the voltage to match note eg C4
***Pressing [YES] while in the menu triggers the output

gate to play the note on the external device note
Voltage Trim - Optional

Precise Trim settings can be adjusted using a voltage
meter on the output if calibration needs to be precise.
10
Select [GLOBAL SETTINGS] > CV Config > Voltage Trim
Check Notes
11 Play the Analog Four keyboard to check corresponding output
notes on the external device
Once set up notes can be set as Trig or Trig

12 Locks on any track as well as the CV track
Calibration of Outputs and trimming of voltages is not a process that is recommended to repeat often. The output calibration should be used sparingly
and only when there is a definitive need perhaps due to analog hardware drift or during initial set up of gear and connections

11 CV Functions
11.6 Setting Up CV Output NOTES
CV setup may initially seem daunting but is fairly simple. This guide steps
through the process. This section assumes the devices are connected to
control from the Analog Four. CV A (AB on MkI) for the Trigger / Gate and
CV C (CD on MkI) for Control Voltage are used as the examples here.
▌SETTING CV TRIGGER OUTPUT


CONFIG.
4. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight CV to

configure i.e. CV A Config.
5. Press [YES] to select CV A CONFIG or [NO] to cancel.
6. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight the

TYPE Parameter to change. [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to
change TYPE and for the trigger settings choose either:
• TRIG: Contains sub menu settings for length, polarity and

level.
• GATE: Contains sub menu settings for polarity and level.
• CLOCK: Contains sub menu settings for length, polarity, level

submenu parameter.
8. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change each setting.
9. Activating a keyboard note should trigger the output.
10. Exit GLOBAL SETTINGS. Back up through menu using [NO].
11. Select the CV Track [CV].
12. Select the CV page for the channel i.e. [CV A].
13. Set the TRK or SRC parameter to the source track where trigs or trig
locks are programmed which will then activate the output.

CV Functions 11
NOTES
▌SETTING CV CONTROL VOLTAGE OUTPUT


CONFIG.

configure i.e. CV C Config.
5. Press [YES] to select CV C CONFIG or [NO] to cancel.

TYPE parameter to change. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to
change the TYPE setting. For the trigger settings choose either:
• PITCH V/Oct: Contains sub menu settings for note1, voltage

1, note 2, voltage 2.
• PITCH Hz/V: Contains sub menu settings for note1, voltage 1,

note 2, voltage 2.
• VALUE LIN: Contains sub menu settings for min, max

submenu parameter.
8. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the setting.
9. Press [NO] to back up out of GLOBAL SETTINGS.
10. Press to select CV Track 6 [CV].
11. Press the parameter page eg [CV C] to select the settings
12. Set the parameters that are available for the defined setting to activate
the control voltage. These include TUN - Tuning, FIN - Fine Tuning,
Bend, Slide and Source track to program trigs / trig locks for CV.

11 CV Functions
NOTES
▌CALIBRATING CV CONTROL VOLTAGE OUTPUT
1. A musical tuner may be needed on the external device audio.

Alternatively this can be tuned by ear or using a separate instrument
such as a piano to reference the notes. Tuning should only be required
when gear may have drifted or first time connecting.


CONFIG.

configure i.e. CV C Config.
6. Press [YES] to select CV C CONFIG or [NO] to cancel.

TYPE to change. PITCH V/Oct or PITCH Hz/V: each contains sub
menu settings for note1, voltage 1, note 2, voltage 2.
8. To calibrate the Hz/V or V/Oct output
• Use [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to set note 1 pressing [YES]

will trigger the output and note on the external device.
• Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the setting to

the target note i.e. C1.
• Use [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to set voltage 1. Pressing

[YES] will trigger the output and note on the external device.
• Press [YES] + [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the

voltage setting to tune to the note i.e. C1
• Repeat for note 2 and voltage 2. Set note 2 to 2 or 3 octave apart

from note 1.
9. Press keyboard to check the output pitch matches the note

CV Functions 11
NOTES
▌SETTING CV CONTROL TO OFF
1. Press [GLOBAL SETTINGS] on the MkII and [FUNC] + Keyboard [C2]


CONFIG

configure i.e. CV B Config.
5. Press [YES] to select CV B CONFIG or [NO] to cancel.
6. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll to TYPE.
7. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the setting to

GROUNDED.

11 CV Functions
11.7 CV Envelope Destinations - ENV1 NOTES
CV Envelope Page 1 - Env1 destinations are available, set with DST (G)
and (I) Parameter. Envelopes are covered in the modulation section.
Meta None Off
CV A TUN Course Tune
CV A FIN Fine Tune
CV A VAL Value (Value Lin)
CV A TRK Source SRC Track
CV A BND Bend Depth
CV A SLI Note Slide Time
CV B TUN Course Tune
CV B FIN Fine Tune
CV B VAL Value (Value Lin)
CV B TRK Source SRC Track
CV B BND Bend Depth
CV B SLI Note Slide Time
CV C TUN Course Tune
CV C FIN Fine Tune
CV C VAL Value (Value Lin)
CV C TRK Source SRC Track
CV C BND Bend Depth
CV C SLI Note Slide Time
CV D TUN Course Tune
CV D FIN Fine Tune
CV D VAL Value (Value Lin)
CV D TRK Source SRC Track
CV D BND Bend Depth
CV D SLI Note Slide Time

CV Functions 11
NOTES 11.7 CV Envelope Destinations - ENV2
CV Envelope Page 2, Env2 destinations are available, set with DST (G)
and (I) Parameter. Envelopes are covered in the modulation section.
Meta None Off
CV A FIN Fine Tune
CV A BND Bend Depth
CV B FIN Fine Tune
CV B BND Bend Depth
CV C FIN Fine Tune
CV C BND Bend Depth
CV D FIN Fine Tune
CV D BND Bend Depth
ENV 1 ATK Attack
ENV 1 DEC Decay
ENV 1 SUS Sustain
ENV 1 REL Release
ENV 1 LEN Gate Length
ENV 1 DEP Depth A
ENV 1 DEP Depth B
LFO 1 SPD Speed
LFO 1 FAD Fade In / Fade Out
LFO 1 DEP Depth A
LFO 1 DEP Depth B

11 CV Functions
11.7CV LFO Destinations - LFO1 NOTES
Destinations are set in the CV LFO1 Page 1 with DST (G) and (I)
Parameters. LFO functions are described in the modulation section
Meta None Off
CV A FIN Fine Tune
CV A BND Bend Depth
CV B FIN Fine Tune
CV B BND Bend Depth
CV C FIN Fine Tune
CV C BND Bend Depth
CV D FIN Fine Tune
CV D BND Bend Depth
ENV 1 ATK Attack
ENV 1 DEC Decay
ENV 1 SUS Sustain
ENV 1 REL Release
ENV 1 DEP Depth A
ENV 1 DEP Depth B

CV Functions 11
NOTES 11.7 CV LFO Destinations - LFO2
Meta None Off
CV A FIN Fine Tune
CV A BND Bend Depth
CV B FIN Fine Tune
CV B BND Bend Depth
CV C FIN Fine Tune
CV C BND Bend Depth
CV D FIN Fine Tune
CV D BND Bend Depth

11 CV Functions
11.7 CV LFO Destinations - LFO2 - (Continued) NOTES
ENV 1 ATK Attack
ENV 1 DEC Decay
ENV 1 SUS Sustain
ENV 1 REL Release
ENV 1 DEP Depth A
ENV 1 DEP Depth B
ENV 2 ATK Attack
ENV 2 DEC Decay
ENV 2 SUS Sustain
ENV 2 REL Release
ENV 2 DEP Depth A
ENV 2 DEP Depth B
LFO 1 SPD Speed
LFO 1 DEP Depth A
LFO 1 DEP Depth B

CV Functions 11
NOTES 11.8 CV Inputs MK II
Analog Four MkII has 2 physical CV Control Voltage or Expression pedal

inputs. The Analog Four MkI has no dedicated CV / Expression inputs.
These examples cover MkII.
6.35mm (1/4inch) Stereo Phono

TRS (Tip, Ring, Sleeve) plug.
Expression
Learn
Expression Pedal or
external CV hardware can
be connected to the inputs
+5.5V CV MAX LEVEL
CV ZERO LEVEL
-5.5V

11 CV Functions
NOTES
MK II
Control Input Modes
3 Control modes are available with associated sub functions. These can be
set up for the control inputs on the Analog Four MKII. These are found in
the global settings under the control input 1 and 2 options.
Control Input 1
Mode Sub function Description Volt Range

Sets the voltage that is defined for CV voltage
CV CV Zero Level -5.50 to +5.50
modulation of zero i.e. no modulation point.
Sets the voltage that is defined for max CV
CV CV Max Level -5.50 to +5.50
voltage modulation i.e. full modulation point.
Sets the upper and lower limits of the control
EXPR Expression Learn
input. Connect expression pedal to set.
Reverses direction of the expression pedal
EXPR Reverse Direction
control input
OFF Control input 1 not used.
Control Input 2
Mode Sub function Description Volt Range

Sets the voltage that is defined for CV voltage
CV CV Zero Level -5.50 to +5.50
modulation of zero i.e. no modulation point.
Sets the voltage that is defined for max CV
CV CV Max Level -5.50 to +5.50
voltage modulation i.e. full modulation point.
Sets the upper and lower limits of the control
EXPR Expression Learn
input. Connect expression pedal to set.
Reverses direction of the expression pedal
EXPR Reverse Direction
control input
OFF Control input 2 not used.

CV Functions 11
NOTES
▌INITIAL SET UP OF AN EXPRESSION PEDAL INPUT MK II
There are two elements to setting CV and Expression. Firstly the GLOBAL
SETTING setup to get the pedal working and in the KIT menu to set it as a
performance macro for applying its use. This process is the first part.
1. Connect an expression pedal to Input EXP/CV IN 1 or EXP/CV IN 2 of

the Analog Four MkII. Example Input 1.
2. Press [GLOBAL SETTINGS] to Select the GLOBAL Menu.
3. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight eg

CONTROL INPUT 1. Select the option where the pedal is connected.
4. Press [YES] to select CONTROL INPUT 1 or [NO] to cancel.
5. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll through the Sub menu
options to highlight MODE.
6. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the MODE setting

to EXP for Expression Pedal.

EXPRESSION PEDAL Learn options.
8. Press [YES] to activate learn mode.
9. Operate the physical pedal fully down and fully up several times.
10. Press [YES] to end learn mode and save the self calibration setting.
11. The Expression Pedal signal can be reversed also in this menu.
12. Exit GLOBAL SETTINGS by backing up using [NO]

11 CV Functions
NOTES
▌PERFORMANCE SET UP OF AN EXPRESSION PEDAL MK II
SETTING setup to get the pedal working and secondly in the KIT menu to
set it as a performance macro for applying its use. This process is the
second part.
1. Ensure expression pedal is connected and set up to an Input eg

EXP/CV IN 1.
2. Press [KIT] to Select the kit menu.

CONTROL IN 1 MOD for Input 1 or 2 (which ever input is used).
4. Press [YES] to select CONTROL IN 1 MOD or [NO] to cancel.
5. The operation of the expression pedal can be seen on the left of the
display bar graph.
6. Select and amend 1 or up to 5 of the modulation destination parameters

in the same way as setting performance parameters. Example
parameter 1 is (A) / (F) DATA ENTRY.
• Press DATA ENTRY (A) to select parameter 1 destination

track.
• Turn DATA ENTRY (A) to Assign a parameter from the

destination list for Track assigned earlier.
• Turn DATA ENTRY (F) to adjust the parameter depth.
Repeat for the other 4 parameters if required.
7. Operating the expression pedal will now operate the parameter

modulations of the assigned destinations.

CV Functions 11
NOTES
▌INITIAL SET UP OF A CV INPUT MK II
SETTING setup and in the KIT menu to set it as a performance macro for
applying its use. This process is the first part.
1. Connect a CV Signal from external gear to Input EXP/CV IN 1 or

EXP/CV IN 2 of the Analog Four MkII. Example Input 2.
2. Press [GLOBAL SETTINGS] to Select the GLOBAL Menu.

CONTROL INPUT 2. Select the option where the CV is connected.
4. Press [YES] to select CONTROL INPUT 2 or [NO] to cancel.
5. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll through the sub menu
options to highlight MODE.
6. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the MODE setting

to CV.
7. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight the CV

option CV ZERO LEVEL. This is the voltage level that the Analog Four
will recognise as zero aligned to the external device.
8. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the CV ZERO

LEVEL between -5.5V (-5500) and +5.5V (+5500).
9. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight the CV

option CV MAX LEVEL. This is the voltage level that the Analog Four
will recognise as maximum from the external device.
10. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the CV MAX LEVEL
between -5.5V (-5500) and +5.5V (+5500).
11. Exit GLOBAL SETTINGS by backing up using [NO]

11 CV Functions
NOTES
▌ MODULATION SET UP OF A CV INPUT MK II
There are two elements to setting CV. Firstly the GLOBAL SETTING
setup and secondly in the KIT menu to set it as a performance macro
for applying its use. This process is the second part.
1. Ensure external CV gear is connected and set up to an Input eg

EXP/CV IN 2. The Input global settings for CV range are set up.
2. Press [KIT] to Select the kit menu.

CONTROL IN 2 MOD for Input 2 or 1 (which ever input is used).
4. Press [YES] to select CONTROL IN 1 MOD or [NO] to cancel
5. The level or modulation of the CV control input can be seen on the left
of the display bar graph.
6. Select and amend 1 or up to 5 of the modulation destination parameters

in the same way as setting performance parameters. Example
parameter 1, (A) / (F) DATA ENTRY
• Press DATA ENTRY (A) to select parameter 1 destination

track
• Turn DATA ENTRY (A ) to assign a parameter from the

destination list for Track assigned earlier.
• Turn DATA ENTRY (F) to adjust the parameter depth
• Repeat for the other 4 parameters if required.
7. Operating the external gear will now operate the parameter modulations
of the assigned destinations

CV Functions 11
NOTES 11.9 General External CV Notes
As a summary of typical connections, where Analog Four is the
master to control other gear the following notes apply.
Pitch
Control Voltage
• It is important to match up the settings in the Analog Four to the

external gear. There are many variations and generations of hardware
with different standards for CV. It is important to align the voltages.
• V/Oct is a CV standard commonly found in Moog, Roland, Eurorack.

Korg and Yamaha typically use Hz/Volt.
• Korg operates traditionally on the Hz/Volt standard for example the Korg
MS20 Mini. While there are many modular patch options the VCO2 or
VCO 1+2 for CV Control and Trig In for Gate set as S-Trig are typical
starting points.
• Moog uses the V/Oct standard for CV control. For example the Moog
Mother 32 connections could be CV to VCO 1v/Oct and the gate to
Gate on the Mother 32.
• Get creative by using the parameter locks on the Analog Four tracks
when controlling CV. For example setting the Value Lin parameter to
control frequency cutoff instead of Pitch on an external device.
• Triggers from CV control envelopes on the external device. Envelopes

on the Analog Four can also be assigned to the CV control voltages.
• When using CV the CV track is not the only track than can send CV out.
TRK Source (SRC) Parameter can also be used on the parameter page
to assign the source to the CV from any other track.

NOTES

12
Global & System
So far there has been a lot of Analog Four detail
regarding covered and almost all functions
explained in the previous sections. There are
however a few additional parameters and menu
options that haven't been covered fully but still
require some explanation. Many of these
elements don't fit perfectly into a previous
chapter of this book so consider it a ‘catch all’
for anything that remains untouched so far.
Most of what’s covered in this section applies at
a system or global level on the Analog Four
device and as such is applicable across all of
the device variations. Functions such as OS
upgrade, diagnostic tests, synth tuning are
covered within this section. OS Upgrades are
generally covered but always refer to the
Elektron documentation with each OS release
to ensure the correct process and the right
steps are followed.

12 Global & System
12.1 Global Slots NOTES
Several additional parameters and functions that operate at a global level

are contained within the GLOBAL menu [GLOBAL SETTINGS]. Global slots
are locations that automatically store a series of global settings. For
example a multi map setting can be stored in each slot. The synth,
sequence, CV and MIDI settings are stored within global slots. Changes
are automatically saved when changing the slot.
▌SETTING A GLOBAL SLOT

2. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight GLOBAL

SLOT.
3. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the setting. There

are 4 available slots. The current slot is shown in parenthesis /
brackets.
GLOBAL SLOTS
1 2 3 4
Settings Settings Settings Settings
Synth Settings
Sequence Settings
CV Settings
MIDI Settings
System Level Parameters

Global & System 12
NOTES 12.2 Synth Master Tune
The tuning of the synth tracks is based on the 12 tone equal temperament
standard. This means an octave is divided into 12 equal (logarithmic) parts.
This is standard in western tuning systems.
▌ADJUSTING THE SYNTH MASTER TUNING

2. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight

SYSTEM.
4. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight SYNTH

MASTER TUNE.
6. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the tuning.
440Hz
Middle A

12 Global & System
12.3 Sequencer Config NOTES
Two system settings are available that refer to the sequencer within the
global settings. These are QUANTIZE LIVE RECORDING which will
quantize live recorded trigs to full step positions and not micro timed. KIT
RELOAD ON CHG will reload kits to the previously saved state when a new
kit becomes active i.e. on patterns containing original kit.
▌SETTING QUANTIZE DURING LIVE RECORDING


CONTROL.

SEQUENCER CONFIG.

QUANTIZE LIVE REC.
7. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] [YES] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the setting

ON i.e. checked or OFF.
▌SETTING TO RELOAD A KIT FROM SAVED STATE


CONTROL.

SEQUENCER CONFIG.
5. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight KIT

RELOAD ON CNG.
6. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] [YES] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the setting

ON i.e. checked or OFF.

Global & System 12
NOTES 12.4 Voice Routing
Although the polyphony and track voices can be set up specifically, there is
also a global option for voice routing. Kit settings - KIT Menu, for voice
configuration override the global settings. To use global routing select this
option in the global menu.
▌SET USB GAIN FOR AUDIO OVER USB (OVERBRIDGE MODE ONLY)

2. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight AUDIO

ROUTING.
4. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight USB TO

MAIN (dB). Only available in overbridge mode.
5. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the gain setting.
▌ROUTE GLOBAL VOICES TO MAIN OUTPUT


ROUTING.
4. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight TO

MAIN.
5. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to select each voice.
6. Press [YES] to toggle ON or OFF- Checked is ON.
7. Alternatively use TRIG keys 1-4 to toggle routing to MAIN output and
TRIG 9-12 for FX routing while in the voice routing screen.

12 Global & System
NOTES
▌ROUTE GLOBAL VOICES TO FX OUTPUT


ROUTING.
4. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight TO FX.
5. Press [YES] [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to select each voice.
6. Press [YES] to toggle ON or OFF - Checked is ON.
7. Alternatively use TRIG keys 1-4 to toggle routing to MAIN output and
TRIG 9-12 for FX routing while in the voice routing screen.

Global & System 12
NOTES
The Analog Four MKII has USB Class compliance functionality which
includes audio over USB. Audio in and out via the USB connection can be
routed in the MKII device within the global audio routing settings.
▌ROUTE GLOBAL VOICES TO FROM USB IN (MKII Only)
1. Press [GLOBAL SETTINGS] on the MkII.

ROUTING.
4. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight USB IN

(Only available when USB Config is set to USB AUDIO/MIDI.
5. Press [YES] [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to select the available

option:-
• MAIN OUT. Incoming audio routed to main out
• VOICE 1-4. Incoming audio is summed to mono and routed to

selected voice.
• L: V1-3 / R: V2-4. Left and Right channel is sent to separate voices.
• OFF. No audio is sent from the USB device to the Analog Four.

12 Global & System
NOTES
▌ROUTE GLOBAL VOICES TO FROM USB OUT (MKII Only)
1. Press [GLOBAL SETTINGS] on the MkII.

ROUTING.
4. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight USB

OUT (Only available when USB Config is set to USB AUDIO/MIDI.
5. Press [YES] [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to select the available

option:-
• MAIN OUT. Outgoing audio routed from main out
• VOICE 1-4. Audio from selected voice is routed to USB device
• EXT IN. Outgoing audio is routed straight from Analog Four EXT IN
connected device to the USB device.
• L: V1-3 / R: V2-4. Selected audio is routed separately to Left and

Right channel.
• OFF. No audio is sent to the USB device to the Analog Four.

Global & System 12
12.5 System Menu
The SYSTEM sub-menu is found in the [SETTINGS] GLOBAL SETTINGS menu.
SYSTEM
USB CONFIG OS UPGRADE FORMAT +DRIVE
Switches between the USB Overbridge Switches to listening for a Sysex Erases and formats the non volatile
mode and the normal USB-MIDI Only transfer of the new OS. C6 utility can be storage drive contained within
mode. Ensure Overbridge setting is only used to perform the transfer the new Analog Four. Enables selection of
set when interfacing to overbridge OS across from PC/Mac to Analog Four projects & sounds.
CALIBRATION MASTER TUNE
The Analog Four is factory calibrated and as Sets the master tuning of the analog
such it is NOT recommended to recalibrate oscillators. Default is 440.0Hz (Middle A)
as a user. Calibration is a long process and
precise conditions such as device warmup
are prerequisite requirements.
Some features within the SYSTEM sub-menu can be destructive and care must be taken to not lose data and audio.
Back up the device before undertaking the steps in these processes.
The current OS can be checked by observing the opening page bottom right during initial Analog Four power up.

12 Global & System
12.6 USB Overbridge Configuration NOTES
Analog Four has the ability to interface to a PC / MAC and various DAW’s
(Digital Audio Workstation). Overbridge is a software technology that
enables Elektron devices to communicate and transfer analog audio from
the Elektron device.
▌SETTING ANALOG FOUR AS AN OVERBRIDGE DEVICE


SYSTEM.
4. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll and highlight USB

CONFIG.
6. Press [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to select OVERBRIDGE

MODE or USB- MIDI ONLY (Selected toggles between the two, i.e.
When the off is selected to on, the other option will switch off).
7. Press [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to select the change. Checked

is ON.
ANALOG FOUR PC / MAC
Can be controlled by the Overbridge App/ Overbridge 2.0 operates as a

VST. Analog Four can be controlled from stand alone or a DAW VST
the DAW and Stand Alone Overbridge integrated device within the PC /
Interface. Mac environment.
Total Recall: Syncs the DAW saved project and parameter settings in the PC/MAC to the Analog
Four device. All 4 Audio tracks stream into the PC/MAC environment via USB and can be recorded
individually or collectively in the DAW.

Global & System 12
NOTES 12.7 OS Upgrade
Analog Four may need an operating system update to either fix bugs on
prior versions or to add new or enhanced features. The process requires
the transfer of the new OS Sysex file which will then run an update script
automatically.
▌UPGRADING ANALOG FOUR OS
Analog Four must be connected by USB to a PC/ MAC which hosts the
TRANSFER tool.
1. Open Transfer and set the Analog Four as the MIDI In and Out in the
CONNECTIONS page.

3. Select SYSTEM page, scrolling with (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP] [DOWN].
4. Press [YES] to select SYSTEM and reach the sub menu.
5. Highlight OS UPGRADE and press [YES] to select.
6. This will switch to Sysex listening mode and await transfer from the PC /
MAC. Press [NO] to cancel and backup to sub menu.
7. Ensure TRANSFER utility is open on the PC / MAC and indicates the

communicates to Analog Four is set for MIDI Input and Output.
8. Drag and drop the new OS Sysex file to the transfer ‘Drop’ window in
TRANSFER.
9. Analog Four will indicate transfer status, then install and reboot the OS.
TRANSFER
New OS Sysex file is dragged to the
TRANSFER utility ‘Drop’ window and is
transferred to and the OS is updated
DO NOT POWER OFF ANALOG FOUR DURING THE UPDATE UNTIL THE DEVICE NOTIFIES THAT THE REBOOT IS COMPLETE

12 Global & System
NOTES
▌UPGRADING ANALOG FOUR OS FROM STARTUP MENU
1. Connect Analog Four using USB to a PC/ MAC and TRANSFER.

Ensure USB settings are correct and not in overbridge mode.
2. Hold [FUNC] and power ON Analog Four.
3. Analog Four will start up in the STARTUP MENU.
4. Press TRIG [4] key for OS UPGRADE.
5. With Analog Four in ‘ready to receive’ Sysex listening mode, transfer

from the PC/MAC using TRANSFER or C6 Utility or a SysEx utility
6. Analog Four will install and reboot the new OS.
Do not power off the device during the transfer or reboot process until the
update reboot process is completed. Elektron recommend the TM-1 MIDI
Interface when using MIDI transfers to a PC / MAC.
▌CHECKING ANALOG FOUR CURRENT OS
1. Power ON the Analog Four.
2. During the boot screen graphic the currently installed OS is displayed

for a short period on the start up screen.

Global & System 12
NOTES 12.8 Legacy OS Upgrade Information
Older OS versions use a tool called C6 by Elektron for OS transfers. This
has now been replaced by the Elektron Transfer utility. A legacy upgrade
mode also exists within the transfer tool. This step is included for
completeness and reference for older legacy systems only.
▌LEGACY UPGRADES OF ANALOG FOUR OS WITH TRANSFER
1. Connect Analog Four by USB to a PC / MAC that hosts Transfer tool.

Ensure Analog Four is not in Overbridge USB mode.

3. Highlight SYSTEM page by scrolling with (TRACK LEVEL) or [UP]

[DOWN].
6. This will switch to Sysex listening mode and await transfer from the PC /
MAC. Press [NO] to cancel and backup the menu.
7. Ensure the Transfer utility is open on the PC / MAC and indicates the
communicates is set to Analog Four or MIDI Input and Output.
8. On the Transfer CONNECTIONS page, Select ‘go to LEGACY OS

UPGRADE mode’ within the underlined text on the screen.
9. Select the new OS file on the PC / Mac using the browser option.
10. Ensure Analog Four is the device shown as connected.
11. Press ‘UPGRADE’.
12. The file should transfer and install. A reboot of the Analog Four will also
take place.
This is for reference for legacy systems only. Elektron’s Transfer utility is the current tool used. Check Elektron’s OS ‘Read Me’ files and
OS documents to ensure the most recent and compatible update process is followed.
DO NOT POWER OFF THE DEVICE UNTIL THE OS UPDATE IS NOTIFIED ON ANALOG FOUR AS COMPLETE. ALWAYS READ
LATEST OS UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS SUPPLIED WITH NEW OS BEFORE PROCEEDING

12 Global & System
NOTES
LEGACY UPGRADES
ANALOG FOUR
Within the SYSTEM menu [GLOBAL] Settings, select OS UPGRADE.

Analog Four waits for file transfer. Current OS version displayed on start up
C6 TRANSFER
LOAD new OS into C6 utility on the Mac or Legacy mode exists within the Transfer utility
PC. Press SEND to transfer. C6 may not be for older OS versions.
compatible with modern PC / Mac operating
systems.
Other SysEx tools may also be used.
This is for reference for legacy systems only. Elektron’s Transfer utility is the current tool used. Check Elektron’s OS ‘Read Me’ files
and OS documents to ensure the most recent and compatible update process is followed.

Global & System 12
NOTES
▌LEGACY UPGRADES OF ANALOG FOUR OS WITH C6
C6 is a SysEx tool for transferring files. This has been superseded by

Elektron’s Transfer tool. Connect Analog Four by USB (USB recommended,
although MIDI IN can also be used) to a PC / MAC that hosts the C6 Sysex
utility software and the new OS. Ensure Analog Four is not in Overbridge
USB mode. Always read the supplied OS documentation before upgrading.


[DOWN].
5. This will switch to SysEx listening mode and await transfer from the PC
/ MAC. Press [NO] to cancel and backup the menu.
6. Ensure C6 utility is open on the PC / MAC and indicates the

communicates to Analog Four is set for MIDI input and output.
7. LOAD the new OS Sysex file to C6 window and press SEND.
8. Analog Four will indicate status, then install and reboot on the new OS.

12 Global & System
12.9 Formatting and checking the +Drive storage NOTES
Analog Four has a non-volatile +Drive that can be erased using the format
utility. This is a destructive process and backups should be made prior to
proceeding.
▌FORMATTING & ERASING ANALOG FOUR +DRIVE


[DOWN].
4. Highlight FORMAT +DRIVE and press [YES] to select the sub menu.
5. Check the PROJECTS + SOUNDS or SELECTED DATA to erase using

[RIGHT] [LEFT] to check the selection and [UP] [DOWN] to scroll the
options.
6. Once selections have been made press [YES] to proceed to format and
erase or [NO] to cancel and step back in the menu.
7. Press [YES] again to confirm erasure.

Global & System 12
12.10 Start Up Boot Menu
Hidden functions which operate in the Analog Four Boot system prior to start up of the OS are
available at power up. Hold [FUNC] while powering up Analog Four to access the early startup boot
menu. Select the menu options using the respective Trig [1], [2], [3] or [4] key for the selected menu
option.
ANALOG MENU
1 … TEST MODE
2 … EMPTY RESET
3 … FACTORY RESET
4 … OS UPGRADE
TEST MODE EMPTY RESET FACTORY RESET OS UPGRADE
Runs a diagnostic test. When Erases all patterns, sounds and Will initialise Analog Four RAM This option allows OS upgrades
complete a test report is issued songs from Analog Four to its original state by using Sysex transfer. It is
and should read 0 ERRORS if overwriting project, pattern and recommended to use the
all is ok. Contact Elektron if settings data and by restoring transfer utility option instead of
there are system problems the original preset sounds, this start up menu function.
indicated. Other diagnostics are patterns and settings to +Drive Read and follow the Elektron
also available such as Key project slot 1 and Sound Bank instructions supplied with each
Tests which will test all the A. Active project stored on the OS release.
manual operation of key and +Drive in slots 2+ will be
encoder actions and show the retained.
status on the display.

NOTES

13
Analog Keys
The third model in the Elektron ‘Analog Four’ and the same highly featured Elektron
collection is the Analog Keys, a keyboard sequencer. Some items covered here also apply
equipped variant of the Analog Four MkI. It is to the Analog Four modules, when using an
safe to accept that the walk-though guides, external keyboard. For example while velocity
instructions and descriptions for the MkI settings are important for the Analog Keys they
contained within this notebook also apply for also apply for externally connected MIDI
the majority of functions when using the Analog keyboards on the Analog Four modules. More
Keys. However there are some design and detailed information on these topics is contained
layout changes and some functionality that in this section. The general rule of thumb is to
have differences. This section highlights the use the MkI functionality for using Analog Keys
main differences and features that appear on and where deviations exist the Analog Key
the Analog Keys model. Analog Keys features specifics are highlighted here.
a 37 key velocity sensitive keyboard complete
with aftertouch functionality and built in power
supply unit with direct mains supply connection.
All 4 synth tracks have individual audio outputs.
There are also some additional controls and
layout which makes the workflow a little easier.
However the mainstay of the unit, the sound
engine remains the same as Analog Four MkI
with analog signal path, digital control, effects

13 Analog Keys
13.1 Analog Keys Settings Menus NOTES
The parameter menus are available as dedicated buttons on the Analog

Keys as opposed to using the internal keyboard functions on the Analog
Four MkI. These can be accessed directly by selecting the option or using
[FUNC] + Option for accessing the secondary function.
KIT Menu. TRACK Menu SONG Menu

FUNC] + [Poly] opens [FUNC] + [Click] opens [FUNC] + [Global] opens
POLYPHONIC CLICK menu GLOBAL settings menu
configuration menu
SOUND Menu PATTERN Menu.

[FUNC] + [Mute] for trig [FUNC] + [Swing] for
activated track muting SWING Settings
MK I MK II

Analog Keys 13
NOTES 13.2 Sound Selection Wheel
Analog Keys has the added feature of the sound wheel, which when rotated
opens the sound browser automatically. In addition the sound wheel can
also be used within certain menu’s for scrolling and making selections.
Quick sound browsing simply by

turning the sound selection wheel
Also used for scrolling through menu options within certain

menus and in some cases allows selection and changing
of settings.

13 Analog Keys
13.3 Keyboard Control Overview NOTES
Some Keyboard specific functions are now available on the Analog Keys
directly from the control buttons.
Multi Map keyboard splits MIDI Ext switches the DATA Hold enables keyboard to be
mode ON/OFF. [FUNC] + ENTRY and KEYBOARD to control latched continuously. [FUNC]
[Setup] opens MULTI MAP external Midi ON/OFF. [FUNC] + + [KBD Transp] switches
configuration menu [Setup] opens MIDI keyboard sequencer
CONFIGURATION Setup menu transposition ON/OFF
Control Joystick for

controlling parameters
and their modulation
Keyboard octave
transposition indication
Octave Down. Shifts Octave Up. Shifts

Keyboard 1 Octave Keyboard 1 Octave Up
Down per press per press

Analog Keys 13
NOTES 13.4 General Keyboard Setup
The Analog Keys has a 37 key keyboard with indicators for each key and
provides aftertouch and velocity control. The Analog Keys can control 128
keys, 11 octaves and the internal keyboard gives access to 37 notes,
adjusted using the octave up and down across the full range.
Analog Keys Range
Each key has a led indicator. This shows the triggered notes when playing the
sequencer - lit red. Also will show lit red when manually pressed. The led will
illuminate half bright if latched under a ‘HOLD’ state.
C4 C5 C6 C7
Octave Down Octave Up
- +
Octave
Octave range spans 11 octaves with the middle five octaves indicated by a fully bright
lit led indicator. The indicators show the keyboard position within the range with dimmer
led indications as the range gets higher or lower at extremes of the range
SOUND SETTINGS can effect the application of the Analog Keys or an

external keyboard.
• VELOCITY TO VOL which sets up how the keyboard velocity will affect
volume
• VELOCITY TO MIDI : How the keyboard velocity will affect the volume
level of the sound. Off, logarithmic, linear or exponential.
• VELOCITY MOD : Assigns parameters velocity input. Maximum 5

parameters can be set.
• PITCH BEND : Assigns parameters to MIDI Pitch bend. Maximum of 5

parameters can be set.
• BREATH CONTROLLER : Assigns parameters to be affected by the

breath controller input. Maximum 5 parameters can be set.
• AFTERTOUCH : Assigns parameters to be affected by the keyboard or

external MIDI Aftertouch. Maximum of 5 parameters can be set.

13 Analog Keys
NOTES
▌SETTING VELOCITY VOLUME CURVE CHARACTERISTICS
1. Press [SND] MkII or [FUNC] + Keyboard [D1] button to select SOUND

menu.
2. Select the SETTINGS.
3. Highlight VELOCITY TO VOL using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL)
4. Select the option to select which will define the keyboard velocity
characteristics using [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY).
OFF LIN
High High
Volume
Volume
Low Low
Low Velocity Force High Low Velocity Force High
How Hard Key is Pressed How Hard Key is Pressed
Velocity will not affect the volume level. MkI & The volume level will change in a
MkII Sequencing has a value of 100 default linear manner based on the force of
velocity setting in NOTE Menu the keys pressed
EXP LOG
High High
Volume
Volume
Low Low
Low Velocity Force High Low Velocity Force High
How Hard Key is Pressed How Hard Key is Pressed
The volume level will change in an The volume level will change in a
exponential manner based on the force of logarithmic manner based on the force of
the keys pressed the keys pressed
Only available in the Track 1-4, Synth Tracks.
Analog Keys has a Velocity sensitive keyboard. Analog Four has an internal
keyboard which used a default 100 velocity value when sequencing. To maximise
use of velocity curves an external velocity sensitive midi controller is required

Analog Keys 13
NOTES
▌SETTING MODULATION DESTINATION(S)
Up to 5 parameters can be assigned as the destination of the velocity, pitch

bend, mod wheel, breath controller and aftertouch modulation. This can be
the keyboard on Analog Keys or external MIDI In.
1. Press [SOUND] button to select the SOUND SETTINGS.
2. Highlight the SETTINGS to set up using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK

LEVEL).
3. Press [YES] to select the set up option.
4. Highlight the option to set up using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL).
5. Press [YES] to select the set up option.
6. The modulation is set up the same as setting performance controllers.
• VELOCITY MOD refers to how hard the keyboard keys are pressed.
Volume is the typical parameter assigned to velocity.
• PITCH BEND is a specific physical controller commonly found on MIDI

controllers to temporarily change pitch for creative purposes. The
Joystick on the Analog Keys is by default set to pitch bend for LEFT/
RIGHT adjustments.
• MODULATION WHEEL is normally associated with a physical wheel or

slide controller on a MIDI controller which modulates parameters. The
joystick on the Analog Keys is by default assigned to this for the UP
direction.
• BREATH CONTROL is a less common modulation feature. This is

assigned by default as the Joystick DOWN direction.
• AFTERTOUCH is a control built into each of the keyboard keys and

provides additional modulation. Where velocity triggers from the force of
the note pressed, aftertouch is triggered at the bottom end / almost
pressing longer and deeper on a key press.

13 Analog Keys
13.5 Keyboard Multi Mapping NOTES
The Analog Keys has multi map functionality to set up splits across the
keyboard. Details of this are also contained in the Analog Four section.
While Analog Keys has a built in keyboard this feature is particularly useful.
Analog Keys Default Mapping
Drums Bass Pad Lead
Octave Up
Multi Map modes gives access to keyboard splits across 127 keys. The Analog Keys keyboard
contains 37 keys. Access to other octaves is available through changing the keyboard octave up or
down or by connecting an external keyboard
▌SWITCHING MULTI MAP SPLITS ON / OFF
1. Press [MULTI MAP] button to toggle the keyboard splits configuration

ON or OFF.
2. Indicator will illuminate when mode is selected.
▌CONFIGURING MULTI MAPS
1. Press [FUNCTION] + [MULTI MAP] button to access set up menu.
2. Same functionality exists as with Analog Four for configuration, however

the keyboard and indicators offer more integrated representation of the
splits and ranges setup.

Analog Keys 13
NOTES 13.6 External Keyboard Mode
The Analog Keys is a synth and the keyboard by default controls the synth
tracks. The keyboard and controls can also be used as a MIDI controller to
control other external equipment.
▌SETTING EXTERNAL KEYBOARD MODE ON / OFF
1. Press [MIDI EXT] to switch to external midi controller mode.
2. MIDI Out messages will now be sent from the keyboard keys, joystick,
data entry controls and level knob only.
3. Internal functions will not be controlled from the controllers stated in this
mode but the sequencer and tracks will operate as normal.
▌ADJUSTING EXTERNAL KEYBOARD MODE SETTINGS
1. Press [FUNC] + [MIDI EXT] to select the options for external midi
controller mode.
2. Scroll using [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to select the option.
3. Use [LEFT] [RIGHT] or (DATA ENTRY) to change the setting
4. Parameters include:-
• EXT MIDI CH External MIDI Channel to communicate on
• CC PARAM 1 Assign external CC message for DATA ENTRY A
• CC PARAM 2 Assign external CC message for DATA ENTRY B
• CC PARAM 3 Assign external CC message for DATA ENTRY C
• CC PARAM 4 Assign external CC message for DATA ENTRY D
• CC PARAM 5 Assign external CC message for DATA ENTRY E
• CC PARAM 6 Assign external CC message for DATA ENTRY F
• CC PARAM 7 Assign external CC message for DATA ENTRY G
• CC PARAM 8 Assign external CC message for DATA ENTRY H
• CC PARAM 9 Assign external CC message for DATA ENTRY I
• CC PARAM 10 Assign external CC message or DATA ENTRY J

13 Analog Keys
NOTES
Example of using Analog Keys as External Keyboard
Analog Keys connected via 5 Pin midi to Korg MicroKorg
Example: CC74
Filter Cut Off
External Mode on Configure MIDI setting in

[MIDI Ext] the MIDI Ext Menu
+ MIDI CH 1

Analog Keys 13
NOTES 13.7 Hold Function and playing in Key
The dedicated hold function is available on a single key.
▌LATCHING A KEYBOARD NOTE ON / OFF
1. Press [HOLD] + Keyboard [NOTE] to select a note to latch on.
2. The key indicator LED will be lit and the note will play and remain
playing when key is released.
3. Press [HOLD] + Keyboard [NOTE] to select more notes to add to the

latched notes.
4. To release the note press [HOLD] and the Keyboard [NOTE] a second
time or press [HOLD] to release all notes.
▌SELECTING KEYBOARD TRANSPOSE ON / OFF
1. Press [FUNC] + [NOTE] to select the NOTES SETUP.
2. Use [UP] [DOWN] or (TRACK LEVEL) to scroll to highlight TRK KEY

NOTE.
3. Set the note required. Also TRK KEY SCALE may need to be adjusted.
4. Press [FUNC] + [HOLD] to select KBD Transpose mode.
5. Transpose mode is selected which conforms to the settings in the

NOTES SETUP.
6. Press [FUNC] + [HOLD] to exist when in KBD Transpose mode.

13 Analog Keys
13.8 More on the Joystick NOTES
The Joystick can be assigned to 15 parameters. Default set up covers the

pitch bend, modulation wheel and breath control. Set up is carried out in the
same way as setting up performance parameters.
Mod Wheel Up of the

joystick
Pitch Bend Left of the Pitch Bend Right of

joystick the joystick
Breath Control Down

of the joystick
Each of the Pitch Bend, Breath and Mod Wheel settings can be set up with
5 modulation parameter destinations each, totalling 15 parameter
modulations controlled by the joystick.

Analog Keys 13
13.9 Analog Keys MIDI CC Assignments
Synth Osc 1 : Pitch A 16 (0-127) 48 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 0 (0-127)
Synth B 1 (0-127)
Synth Osc 1 : Level E 69 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 4
Synth Noise: S&H A 75 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 10
Synth B 1 (0-127)
Synth Noise: Fade C 76 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 12
Synth D 1 (0-127)
Synth Noise: Level E 77 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 14
Synth F 1 (0-127)
Synth G 1 (0-127)
Synth H 1 (0-127)
Synth I 1 (0-127)
Synth J 1 (0-127)
Synth Osc 2 : Pitch A 17 (0-127) 49 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 20 (0-127)
Synth B 1 (0-127)
Synth Osc 2 : Level E 78 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 24
Synth Common: OSC1 AM A 1 (0-127) 30
Synth Common: Sync Mode B 1 (0-127) 31
Synth Common: Sync Amount C 84 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 32
Synth Common: Bend Amount D 85 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 33
Synth Common: Slide Time E 5 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 34
Synth Common: OSC2 AM F 1 (0-127) 35
Synth Common: Note Sync G 1 (0-127) 36
Synth Common: Vibrato Fade H 1 (0-127) 37
Synth Common: Vibrato Speed I 87 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 38
Synth Common: Vibrato Depth J 88 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 39

13 Analog Keys
13.9 Analog Keys MIDI CC Assignments (cont)
Filters Filter 1 : Frequency A 18 (0-127) 50 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 40 (0-127)
Filters Filter 1 : Resonance B 89 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 41
Filters Filter : Overdrive C 1 (0-127) 42
Filters Filter 1 : Keytrack D 1 (0-127) 43
Filters Filter 1 : Envelope Amount E 102 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 44
Filters Filter 2 : Frequency F 19 (0-127) 51 (0-127 1 (0-127) 45 (0-127)
Filters Filter 2 : Resonance G 90 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 46
Filters Filter 2 : Type H 1 (0-127) 47
Filters Filter 2 : Keytrack I 1 (0-127) 48
Filters Filter 2 : Envelope Amount J 103 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 49
Amp EnvA : Attack Time A 104 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 50
Amp EnvA : Decay Time B 105 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 51
Amp EnvA : Sustain Level C 106 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 52
Amp EnvA : Release Time D 107 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 53
Amp EnvA : Envelope Shape E 1 (0-127) 54
Amp Send Level : Chorus F 91 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 55
Amp Send Level : Delay G 92 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 56
Amp Send Level : Reverb H 93 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 57
Amp Pan I 10 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 58
Amp Volume J 7 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 59
EnvF EnvF : Attack Time A 108 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 60
EnvF EnvF : Decay Time B 109 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 61
EnvF EnvF : Sustain Level C 110 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 62
EnvF EnvF : Release Time D 111 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 63
EnvF EnvF : Envelope Shape E 1 (0-127) 64
EnvF EnvF : Gate Length F 1 (0-127) 65
EnvF EnvF : Destination 1 G 1 (0-127) 66
EnvF EnvF : Depth 1 H 20 (0-127) 52 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 67 (0-127)
EnvF EnvF : Destination 2 I 1 (0-127) 68
EnvF EnvF : Depth 2 J 21 (0-127) 53 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 69 (0-127)
Env2 Env2 : Attack Time A 112 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 70
Env2 Env2 : Decay Time B 113 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 71
Env2 Env2 : Sustain Level C 114 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 72
Env2 Env2 : Release Time D 115 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 73
Env2 Env2 : Envelope Shape E 1 (0-127) 74
Env2 Env2 : Gate Length F 1 (0-127) 75
Env2 Env2 : Destination 1 G 1 (0-127) 76
Env2 Env2 : Depth 1 H 22 (0-127) 54 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 77 (0-127)
Env2 Env2 : Destination 2 I 1 (0-127) 78
Env2 Env2 : Depth 2 J 23 (0-127) 55 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 79 (0-127)

Analog Keys 13
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Destination 1 G 1 (0-127) 86
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Depth 1 H 24 (0-127) 56 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 87 0-127)
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Destination 2 I 1 (0-127) 88
Synth LFO LFO 1 : Depth 2 J 25 (0-127) 57 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 89 (0-127)
Synth LFO LFO 2 : Destination 1 G 1 (0-127) 96
Synth LFO LFO 2 : Depth 1 H 26 (0-127) 58 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 97 (0-127)
Synth LFO LFO 2 : Destination 2 I 1 (0-127) 98
Synth LFO LFO 2 : Depth 2 J 27 (0-127) 59 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 99 (0-127)
FX Ext In CH 1 : Chorus Send A 2 (0-127) 0
FX Ext In CH 1 : Delay Send B 2 (0-127) 1
FX Ext In CH 1 : Reverb Send C 2 (0-127) 2
FX Ext In CH 1 : Pan D 2 (0-127) 3
FX Ext In CH 1 : Level E 2 (0-127) 4
FX Ext In CH 2 : Chorus Send F 2 (0-127) 5
FX Ext In CH 2 : Delay Send G 2 (0-127) 6
FX Ext In CH 2 : Reverb Send H 2 (0-127) 7
FX Ext In CH 2 : Pan I 2 (0-127) 8
FX Ext In CH 2 : Level J 2 (0-127) 9

13 Analog Keys
13,9 Analog Keys MIDI CC Assignments (cont)
FX Chorus Chorus : Pre-delay A 2 (0-127) 40
FX Chorus Chorus : Speed B 2 (0-127) 41
FX Chorus Chorus : Depth C 2 (0-127) 42
FX Chorus Chorus : Width D 2 (0-127) 43
FX Chorus Chorus : Feedback E 2 (0-127) 44
FX Chorus Chorus : HP Filter F 2 (0-127) 45
FX Chorus Chorus : LP Filter G 2 (0-127) 46
FX Chorus Chorus : Delay Send H 2 (0-127) 47
FX Chorus Chorus : Reverb Send I 2 (0-127) 48
FX Chorus Chorus : Send Level J 2 (0-127) 49
FX Delay Delay : Time A 2 (0-127) 50
FX Delay Delay : Mode B 2 (0-127) 51
FX Delay C 2 (0-127) 52
FX Delay Delay : Width D 2 (0-127) 53
FX Delay Delay : Feedback E 2 (0-127) 54
FX Delay Delay : HP Filter F 2 (0-127) 55
FX Delay Delay : LP Filter G 2 (0-127) 56
FX Delay Delay : Overdrive H 2 (0-127) 57
FX Delay Delay : Reverb Send I 2 (0-127) 58
FX Delay Delay : Send Level J 2 (0-127) 59
FX Reverb Reverb : Pre-delay A 2 (0-127) 60
FX Reverb Reverb : Decay Time B 2 (0-127) 61
FX Reverb Reverb : Shelving Freq C 2 (0-127) 62
FX Reverb Reverb : Shelving Gain D 2 (0-127) 63
FX Reverb E 2 (0-127) 64
FX Reverb Reverb : HP Filter F 2 (0-127) 65
FX Reverb Reverb : LP Filter G 2 (0-127) 66
FX Reverb H 2 (0-127) 67
FX Reverb I 2 (0-127) 68
FX Reverb Reverb: Send Level J 2 (0-127) 69
FX LFO LFO 1 : Fade C 2 (0-127) 82
FX LFO LFO 1 : Mode E 2 (0-127) 84
FX LFO LFO 1 : Destination 1 G 2 (0-127) 86
FX LFO LFO 1 : Depth 1 H 2 (0-127) 87 (0-127)
FX LFO LFO 1 : Destination 2 I 2 (0-127) 88
FX LFO LFO 1 : Depth 2 J 2 (0-127) 89 (0-127)

Analog Keys 13
FX LFO LFO 2 : Fade C 2 (0-127) 92
FX LFO LFO 2 : Mode E 2 (0-127) 94
FX LFO LFO 2 : Destination 1 G 2 (0-127) 96
FX LFO LFO 2 : Depth 1 H 2 (0-127) 97 (0-127)
FX LFO LFO 2 : Destination 2 I 2 (0-127) 98
FX LFO LFO 2 : Depth 2 J 2 (0-127) 99 (0-127)
Performance Parameter A A 3 (0-127) 0 0 (0-127)
Performance Parameter B B 4 (0-127) 0 1 (0-127)
Performance Parameter C C 8 (0-127) 0 2 (0-127)
Performance Parameter D D 9 (0-127) 0 3 (0-127)
Performance Parameter E E 11 (0-127) 0 4 (0-127)
Performance Parameter F F 64 (0-127) 0 5 (0-127)
Performance Parameter G G 65 (0-127) 0 6 (0-127)
Performance Parameter H H 66 (0-127) 0 7 (0-127)
Performance Parameter I I 67 (0-127) 0 8 (0-127)
Performance Parameter J J 68 (0-127) 0 9 (0-127)
Modulation Mod Wheel 1 (0-127) 33 (0-127)
Modulation Breathe Controller 2 (0-127) 34 (0-127)
Common Track Level 95 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 100
Track Channel Track Mute (0 = Track Muted) 94 (0-127) 1 (0-127) 101

13 Analog Keys
CV Track CV A : Coarse Tune A 3 (0-127) 0
CV Track CV A : Fine Tune B 3 (0-127) 1
CV Track CV A : Value C 3 (0-127) 2
CV Track CV A : Clock D 3 (0-127) 3
CV Track CV A : Source E 3 (0-127) 4
CV Track CV A : Bend Depth F 3 (0-127) 5
CV Track CV A : Note Slide Time G 3 (0-127) 6
CV Track CV B : Coarse Tune A 3 (0-127) 20
CV Track CV B : Fine Tune B 3 (0-127) 21
CV Track CV B : Value C 3 (0-127) 22
CV Track CV B : Clock D 3 (0-127) 23
CV Track CV B : Source E 3 (0-127) 24
CV Track CV B : Bend Depth F 3 (0-127) 25
CV Track CV B : Note Slide Time G 3 (0-127) 26
CV Track CV C : Coarse Tune A 3 (0-127) 40
CV Track CV C : Fine Tune B 3 (0-127) 41
CV Track CV C : Value C 3 (0-127) 42
CV Track CV C : Clock D 3 (0-127) 43
CV Track CV C : Source E 3 (0-127) 44
CV Track CV C : Bend Depth F 3 (0-127) 45
CV Track CV C : Note Slide Time G 3 (0-127) 46
CV Track CV D : Coarse Tune A 3 (0-127) 50
CV Track CV D : Fine Tune B 3 (0-127) 51
CV Track CV D : Value C 3 (0-127) 52
CV Track CV D : Clock D 3 (0-127) 53
CV Track CV D : Source E 3 (0-127) 54
CV Track CV D : Bend Depth F 3 (0-127) 55
CV Track CV D : Note Slide Time G 3 (0-127) 56

Analog Keys 13
CV LFO LFO 1 : Fade C 3 (0-127) 82
CV LFO LFO 1 : Mode E 3 (0-127) 84
CV LFO LFO 1 : Destination A G 3 (0-127) 86
CV LFO LFO 1 : Depth A H 3 (0-127) 87 (0-127)
CV LFO LFO 1 : Destination B I 3 (0-127) 88
CV LFO LFO 1 : Depth B J 3 (0-127) 89 (0-127)
CV LFO LFO 2 : Fade C 3 (0-127) 92
CV LFO LFO 2 : Mode E 3 (0-127) 94
CV LFO LFO 2 : Destination A G 3 (0-127) 96
CV LFO LFO 2 : Depth A H 3 (0-127) 97 (0-127)
CV LFO LFO 2 : Destination B I 3 (0-127) 98
CV LFO LFO 2 : Depth B J 3 (0-127) 99 (0-127)

NOTES

14
Quick Reference
The final chapter of the Analog Four Notebook and Analog Keys have been covered. There is
and one which simply provides a quick space and margins to capture your own notes
reference for using the Elektron device. All the across the notebook making this guide personal
topics within this quick reference have been and specific to your own journey with the Analog
covered in detail in previous chapters and the Four.
summaries and headlines contained here are a
‘go to’ quick reference for all Analog Four users.
This section is especially useful for
experienced pro’s who are familiar with the
device but occasionally need that quick check
or reaffirmation. Quick references to key press
combinations and illuminated indicators are
covered. Also some useful templates for
capturing some of your set up and
configurations for future reference points.
Close to 300 pages of detailed explanations
and content it may well be that this section you
will be the one that may get printed, sit side by
side with your Analog Four or simply be the key
starting point for some users. Either way the
depth and details of the Analog Four Mk1, MkII

14 Analog Four Quick Reference
14.1 Analog Four MkII Key Combo Quick Reference MK II
Function / Mode Action Key Combo Description

General Copy [FUNC] + [REC] Copies depending on the page in context
General Clear [FUNC] + [PLAY] Clears depending on the page in context
General Paste [FUNC] + [STOP] Pastes depending on the page in context
General Data Entry (DATA ENTRY) Rotate or Press + Rotate for greater increments
General Data Entry [FUNC] + (DATA ENTRY) Parameter jump to step through some options
General Param Page Clear [PARAM PAGE] + [PLAY] Resets all selected param page data to default
General Randomise [PARAM PAGE] + [YES] Randomises parameter pages
General Randomise Reset [PARAM PAGE] + [NO] Resets randomisation to previous state
Navigation Step / Scroll Up [UP] Moves through various menu options
Navigation Step / Scroll Down [DOWN] Moves through various menu options
Navigation Step / Scroll [FUNC] + [UP] [DOWN] Moves by larger pages steps through menus
Navigation Step / Scroll Left [LEFT] Moves through sub menus or toggles a selection
Navigation Step / Scroll Right [RIGHT] Moves through sub menus or toggles a selection
Navigation Scroll (TRACK LEVEL) Scrolls options when in a menu
Navigation Backup [NO] Cancels and / or Backs out of sub menu’s
Navigation Confirm [YES] Activates selected menu option
Navigation Sound Selection (SOUND SELECTION) Selects sounds or navigates in menus
Naming Page Select Letter [FUNC] + [ARROW] Left, Right, Up, Down, selects letter
Naming Page Erases Letter [FUNC] + [NO] Deletes Letter
Naming Page Inserts a Letter [FUNC] + [YES] Inserts a letter or space
Naming Page Selects Character [RIGHT] [LEFT] Navigates back and forth through name
Naming Page Change Character [UP] [DOWN] Increments, decrements selected character
Transport Play [PLAY] Plays the sequence pattern
Transport Play [PLAY] while playing Pauses the playback. [PLAY] again will resume.
Transport Stop [STOP] Stops the sequencer Pattern playback
Transport Stop [STOP] [STOP] Stops all tracks and effects and MIDI notes off
Sequencer Tap Tempo [FUNC] + [TEMPO] Tap x4 or more to select a tap tempo
Sequencer Click Track Menu [FUNC] + [TRK] Selects and opens the click track menu
Sequencer Nudge Tempo [LEFT] [RIGHT] Temporary Nudge tempo playback +/-10%
Sequencer Nudge Trigs [FUNC] + [LEFT][RIGHT] Nudge trigs whole step back or forth (GRID REC)
Sequencer Micro-timing [TRIG] + [LEFT][RIGHT] Nudges Trigs fractionally (GRID REC)
Sequencer Grid Recording [REC] Selects Grid Recording Mode

Analog Four Quick Reference 14
14.1 Analog Four MkII Key Combo Quick Reference (cont) MK II

Sequencer Live Recording [REC] + [PLAY] Starts Live Recording Mode
Sequencer Live Recording [REC] + [PLAY] + [PLAY] Starts Live Recording Mode - Quantized On/Off
Sequencer Clears Live Rec [NO] + [TRIG] Clears Trigs during Live Recording
Sequencer Metronome [FUNC] + [TRK] Long press. Sets Metronome On/Off
Sequencer Clear Pattern [FUNC] + [PLAY] Clears Active Ptn (LIVE REC or No Mode Sel)
Press Trig to enter notes of the current keyboard
Sequencer Adding Note Trig [TRIG]
note in Grid rec mode
Sequencer Adding Note Trig [KEYBOARD] Play keys to capture note trigs in Live Mode
Sequencer Adding Lock Trig [FUNC] + [TRIG] Adds a Lock trig, i.e. Triggers no sound
Sequencer Muting a Trig [TRIG] + [BANK E] Mutes selected trig.
Sequencer Clear Param Lock [FUNC] + [ NO] Clear All parameter locks in Live recording mode
Sequencer Clear Param Lock [TRIG] Press (DATA ENTRY) Clears individual param lock
Sequencer Clear Sound Lock [NO] + Press (DATA ENTRY) Clears individual sound locks
Sequencer Fill Mode [FUNC] + [FILL] Cue’s fill mode for one cycle
Sequencer Fill Mode [FILL] Triggers fill mode for duration of key press
Pattern Select Bank [BANK] A - H Followed by [TRIG] Selects Bank A-H & Pattern
Pattern Select Pattern [PTN] + [1] … [16] Selects a Pattern 1-16
Pattern Clear Pattern [FUNC] + [PLAY] Clears Active Ptn (LIVE REC or No Mode Sel)
Pattern Pattern Mode [FUNC] + [BANK] A-D Selects one of the 4 Pattern modes
Pattern Save Pattern [YES] + [PTN] Saves the active pattern
Pattern Reload Pattern [NO] + [PTN] Reloads pattern to previously saved state
Tracks Select Audio Track [TRACK] Selects Audio Track 1-4

Tracks Select FX Track [FX TRACK] Selects Track 5 which is the FX track
Tracks Select CV Track [CV TRACK] Selects Track 6 which is the CV track
Tracks Clear Track [FUNC] + [PLAY] Clears Active Track (GRID REC)
Tracks Mute [FUNC] + [TRACK] Mutes selected track - sequencer note trigs only
Tracks Transpose Status [TRNS] + [TRACK] Toggle transposable function for track ON or OFF
Tracks Transpose [FUNC] + [TRNS] Lock transpose mode on (keyboard to transpose)
Tracks Save Track [YES] + [TRK] Saves current track
Tracks Reload Track [NO] + [TRK] Reloads from previously saved state
Tracks Mixer [MIX] Opens performance mixer page

14.1 Analog Four MkII Key Combo Quick Reference MK II

Sounds Open Browser Double tap [TRACK] Opens sound browser list.
Sounds Open Browser [FUNC]+(TRACK LEVEL) Opens sound browser list.
Sounds Open Browser (SOUND SELECTION) Analog Keys Only - Sound Wheel
Sounds Save sound [YES] + [SND] Saves the active sound
Sounds Reload sound [NO] + [SND] Reloads the previously saved sound to active
Sounds Save Kit [YES] + [KIT] Saves the active kit
Sounds Reload Kit [NO] + [KIT] Reloads the previously saved kit
Chains / Songs New Scratchpad [FUNC] + [CHAIN MODE] Creates a new blank scratch pad row.
Chains / Songs Song editor [FUNC] + [NO] Delete Pattern in chain.
Chains / Songs Song Editor [FUNC] + [YES] Add song row below
Chains / Songs Song Editor [BANK] + [TRIG] Add a pattern in the song editor
Chains / Songs Song Editor [TRNS] + Keyboard Transposes selected pattern on song editor
Chains / Songs Song [NO] + Keyboard [G1] Reloads previously saved song
Chains / Songs Song [YES] + Keyboard [G1] Saves active song
Scale Scale Setup [FUNC] + [PAGE] Opens Scale set up menu
Scale Page [PAGE] Toggles through available pages - Grid Rec
Scale Page [PAGE] In Scale menu, pattern length 16,32,48,64

NOTES

14.2 Analog Four MkI Key Combo Quick Reference MK I

General Copy [FUNC] + [REC] Copies depending on the page in context
General Clear [FUNC] + [PLAY] Clears depending on the page in context
General Paste [FUNC] + [STOP] Pastes depending on the page in context
General Data Entry (DATA ENTRY) Rotate or Press + Rotate for greater increments
General Data Entry [FUNC] + (DATA ENTRY) Parameter jump to step through some options
General Param Page Clear [PARAM PAGE] + [PLAY] Resets all selected param page data to default
General Randomise [PARAM PAGE] + [YES] Randomises parameter pages
General Randomise Reset [PARAM PAGE] + [NO] Resets randomisation to previous state
Navigation Step / Scroll Up [UP] Moves through various menu options
Navigation Step / Scroll Down [DOWN] Moves through various menu options
Navigation Step / Scroll [FUNC] + [UP] [DOWN] Moves by larger pages steps through menus
Navigation Step / Scroll Left [LEFT] Moves through sub menus or toggles a selection
Navigation Step / Scroll Right [RIGHT] Moves through sub menus or toggles a selection
Navigation Scroll (LEVEL) Scrolls options when in a menu
Navigation Backup [NO] Cancels and / or Backs out of sub menu’s
Navigation Confirm [YES] Activates selected menu option
Navigation Sound Selection (SOUND SELECTION) Selects sounds or navigates in menus
Naming Page Select Letter [FUNC] + [ARROW] Left, Right, Up, Down, selects letter
Naming Page Erases Letter [FUNC] + [NO] Deletes Letter
Naming Page Inserts a Letter [FUNC] + [YES] Inserts a letter or space
Naming Page Selects Character [RIGHT] [LEFT] Navigates back and forth through name
Naming Page Change Character [UP] [DOWN] Increments, decrements selected character
Transport Play [PLAY] Plays the sequence pattern
Transport Play [PLAY] while playing Pauses the playback. [PLAY] again will resume.
Transport Stop [STOP] Stops the sequencer Pattern playback
Transport Stop [STOP] [STOP] Stops all tracks and effects
Sequencer Tap Tempo [FUNC] + [TEMPO] Tap x4 or more to select a tap tempo
Sequencer Click Track Menu [FUNC] + Keyboard [A1] Selects and opens the click track menu
Sequencer Nudge Tempo [LEFT] [RIGHT] Temporary Nudge tempo playback +/-10%
Sequencer Nudge Trigs [FUNC] + [LEFT][RIGHT] Nudge trigs whole step back or forth (GRID REC)
Sequencer Micro-timing [TRIG] + [LEFT][RIGHT] Nudges Trigs fractionally (GRID REC)
Sequencer Grid Recording [REC] Selects Grid Recording Mode

14.2 Analog Four MkI Key Combo Quick Reference (cont) MK I

Sequencer Live Recording [REC] + [PLAY] Starts Live Recording Mode
Sequencer Live Recording [REC] + [PLAY] + [PLAY] Starts Live Recording Mode - Quantized On/Off
Sequencer Clears Live Rec [TRACK] + [NO] Clears Trigs during Live Recording
Sequencer Metronome [FUNC] + Keyboard [A1] Long press. Sets Metronome On/Off
Sequencer Clear Pattern [FUNC] + [PLAY] Clears Active Ptn (LIVE REC or No Mode Sel)
Press Trig to enter notes of the current keyboard
Sequencer Adding Note Trig [TRIG]
note in Grid rec mode
Sequencer Adding Note Trig [KEYBOARD] Play keys to capture note trigs in Live Mode
Sequencer Adding Lock Trig [FUNC] + [TRIG] Adds a Lock trig, i.e. Triggers no sound
Sequencer Muting a Trig [TRIG] + [BANK E] Mutes selected Trig
Sequencer Clear Param Lock [FUNC] + [ NO] Clear All parameter locks in Live recording mode
Sequencer Clear Param Lock [TRIG] Press (DATA ENTRY) Clears individual param lock
Sequencer Fill Mode [YES] + [PAGE] Cue’s fill mode for one cycle
Sequencer Fill Mode [PAGE] Triggers fill for duration of fill press
Pattern Select Bank [BANK] A - H Followed by [TRIG] Selects Bank A-H & Pattern
Pattern Select Pattern [PTN] + [1] … [16] Selects a Pattern 1-16
Pattern Clear Pattern [FUNC] + [PLAY] Clears Active Ptn (LIVE REC or No Mode Sel)
Pattern Pattern Mode [FUNC] + [BANK] A-D Selects one of the 4 Pattern modes
Pattern Save Pattern [YES] + Keyboard [F1] Saves the active pattern
Pattern Reload Pattern [NO] + Keyboard [F1] Reloads pattern to previously saved state
Tracks Select Audio Track [TRACK] Selects Audio Track 1-4

Tracks Select FX Track [FX TRACK] Selects Track 5 which is the FX track
Tracks Select CV Track [CV TRACK] Selects Track 6 which is the CV track
Tracks Clear Track [FUNC] + [PLAY] Clears Active Track (GRID REC)
Tracks Mute [FUNC] + [TRACK] Mutes selected track - sequencer note trigs only
Tracks Transpose Status [TRANSPOSE] + [TRACK] Toggle transposable function for track ON or OFF
Tracks Transpose [FUNC] + [TRANSPOSE] Lock transpose mode on (keyboard to transpose)
Tracks Save Track [YES] + Keyboard [E1] Saves current track
Tracks Reload Track [NO] + Keyboard [E1] Reloads from previously saved state

14.2 Analog Four MkI Key Combo Quick Reference MK I

Sounds Open Browser Double tap [TRACK] Opens sound browser list.
Sounds Open Browser [FUNC] + (LEVEL) Opens sound browser list.
Sounds Open Browser [FUNC] + Keyboard [D1] Hold FUNC + D1 for a second opens browser
Sounds Save sound [YES] + Keyboard [D1] Saves the active sound
Sounds Reload sound [NO] + Keyboard [D1] Reloads the previously saved sound to active
Sounds Save Kit [YES] + Keyboard [C1] Saves the active kit
Sounds Reload Kit [NO] + [Keyboard [C1] Reloads the previously saved kit
Chains / Songs New Scratchpad [FUNC] + [CHAIN MODE] Creates a new blank scratch pad row.
Chains / Songs Song editor [FUNC] + [NO] Delete Pattern in Chain
Chains / Songs Song Editor [FUNC] + [YES] Add song row below
Chains / Songs Song Editor [BANK] + [TRIG] Add a pattern in the song editor
Chains / Songs Song Editor [TRANSPOSE] + Keyboard Transposes selected pattern on song editor
Chains / Songs Song [NO] + [SONG] Reloads previously saved song
Chains / Songs Song [YES] + [SONG] Saves active song
Scale Scale Setup [FUNC] + [PAGE] Opens Scale set up menu
Scale Page [PAGE] Toggles through available pages - Grid Rec
Scale Page [PAGE] In Scale menu, pattern length 16,32,48,64

14.3 Status Indicators - Quick Reference
The status of Analog Four is indicated by various states of the illuminated led’s. This section covers
a selection of the important indicators for the tracks, sequencer and other multi state indicators.
TRACKS
Key Colour Key Status Function Comments / Notes
None Unlit / Off Tracks Track is muted
Green Lit Tracks Track is audible / not muted
Red Lit Tracks Track is selected / active and is audible / not muted
Yellow Lit Tracks Track is selected / active and is muted
Any Dim Tracks FX Track is selected but playing Synth track dimmed.
PATTERN TRIGS AND CHANGE MODES

None Unlit / Off Grid Rec No Trig
Red Lit Grid Rec Step contains a Note Trig
Yellow Lit Grid Rec Step contains a Lock Trig
Red Flash Grid Rec Parameter Lock Present
Red Flash Live Rec / Play Flashes to cycle through sequence steps
Red Dim Bank / Pattern A pattern from the bank exists in the trig location
Red Bright Bank / Pattern The Pattern in the trig locations is the active pattern
None Unlit / Off Bank / Pattern No pattern available in the trig slot
None (MkI) Unlit / Off Bank Group Sequential : Direct Change Mode for patterns
Red [MkI) Lit Bank Group Direct Start : Direct Change Mode for Patterns
Green (MkI) Lit Bank Group Direct Jump : Direct Change Mode for Patterns
On (MkII) Flash Bank Group Temp Jump : Direct Change Mode for Patterns
RECORD
Red Lit Grid Rec Grid Recording Active
Red Flash Live Rec Live Recording Active
None Unlit / Off No Record Recording inactive
PAGE
Red Lit Dim Sequencer Page (up to 16 steps) of trigs exists
Red Flash Sequencer Page currently being played
None Unlit / Off Sequencer Page not in use

14.4 Audio Routing Template
Analog Four AUDIO ROUTING CHART DATE REVISION
AUDIO
Audio In From / To Description
Left
Right
Main Out
Left
Right
Track Out
1
2
3
4
AUDIO ROUTING NOTES
STUDIO
TEMPLATE
Analog Four Routing

14.5 MIDI / CV Routing Template
Analog Four SIGNAL ROUTING CHART DATE REVISION
MIDI
From To Description MIDI Channels
MIDI In
1
MIDI Out 2
3
MIDI Thru 4
Left 5
6
Right 7
8
Track Out 9
10
1
11
2 12
13
3 14
15
4 16
CV
From To CV/Gate Type
CV A
CV B
CV C
CV D
Exp 1 In
Exp 2 In
CV NOTES
STUDIO
TEMPLATE
Analog Four Routing

NOTES

NOTES

Index
+Drive 12, 13, 19, 25, 27 Delay 14, 168
+Drive storage 264 E
A External Audio 181
ACCENT 135 External Keyboard 275
Accents 134 F
Amp 5, 7, 14, 33, 182 fill 127
Analog Four 12 Filter 14, 30, 33, 44, 45, 47, 50,
182
Analog Keys 268
Formatting 264
Arpeggiator 139
FUNC 4, 6
Audio Structure 14
FX Track 169
B
G
Bank 4, 6
Global Slots 250
C
Grid Recording 108
C6 211
H
Chains 150, 151, 154
Hold 277
Clear 8, 114
J
Conditional Locks 12
Joystick 278
conventions 2
K
Copy 8, 114
Key Combo 288, 290, 292, 294,
CV 223 296, 297
CV Inputs 241 Kit 12, 13, 68
D L
Data Entry 5, 7, 16 Length 105

Index
Length Per Pattern 106 Overbridge 12
Level 4 Overdrive 14, 30, 33, 44, 45, 47,

50, 182
LFO 60
P
Live recording 109, 110
Pages 105
Lock Trig 12, 121
Parameter 12
M
Parameter Lock 12, 121
Macros 83
Parameter Navigation 16
MANAGING PROJECTS 21
Paste 8, 114
Master Tune 251
PATTERN 12, 13, 68
Menu Navigation 16
Pattern Change Modes 98
METRONOME 102
Patterns 92, 96
MIDI CC Assignments 199, 201,
203, 205, 207, 279, 281, 283, 285 Performance Mode 80
MIDI Definitions 186 POLYPHONY 71
Midi Structure 15 Power 3
Mixer 14, 168 Project 12, 13
MULTI MAP 193, 274 Project Management 9, 18, 25, 27,

29, 30, 33, 57, 68, 78, 82, 83, 85,
N 87
Naming Menu 17 Project Structure 13
NOTE SLIDE 135 Pulse Width Modulation 38
Note Trig 12 R
Note Trigs 107 Randomize 87
O REC 112, 113
OS Upgrade 259, 261 Reverb 14, 168

Index
S USB 258
Sequencer 93 V
Slide 134 Voice Routing 253
Song 150 Volume 4, 6
Sound 13 W
Sound Lock 12, 121 Wave 36
Sound Pool 13, 25 Waveforms 36
Sound Selection 269
Start Up Boot Menu 265
Swing 134
Sysex 211, 214, 217
System Menu 257
Tempo 4
Timing 105
Track 12, 13, 68
Track Status 295
Transpose 137
Trig 12, 107
Trig Keys 4, 7
Trig Page 34, 35, 37, 39–44, 46,

47, 50, 51, 54–56, 58, 59, 118,
120, 170, 171, 173, 174, 176, 177
Trig Parameters 5, 7

Copyright © 2020 by SynthDawg
All rights reserved. This book or any portion thereof may not be reproduced or
used in any manner whatsoever without the express written permission of the
publisher except for the use of brief quotations in a book review. All artwork,
diagrams, instructions and guidance notes have been originally produced
based on user experience. This book is an independent production and any
official endorsement or sponsorship by any manufacturers named within has
not been granted nor been sought.
Produced in the United Kingdom
December 2020 : Version 2 - Analog Four OS 1.50a
www.synthdawg.com

www.synthdawg.com
@synthdawg

Analog Four Notebook 1v50a

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Analog Four Notebook 1v50a

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

II Contents he Analog Four Notebook

Patterns Advanced 117

Chains & Songs 149

MIDI & USB 185

Global & System 249

Analog Keys 267

Quick Reference 287

The Analog Four Notebook Contents III

The Analog Four Notebook Contents 1

The book is written with these conventions:-

Rounded parentheses represent the rotary controls for example:-

(DATA ENTRY) controls labelled (A) - (J).

(TRACK LEVEL) for the Level/Data control.

Square parentheses contain functions that are selectable by a specifically

[FUNC] + [REC] - Functions which require multiple button selections

[SONG] Song Mode [CHAIN] Chain Mode

[TEMPO] Tempo and Metronome Setting

Did you know?

2 Contents he Analog Four Notebook

On / Off 12V DC Power Hi Speed 5 Pin MIDI DIN 2 x ¼ Mono / 1 x ¼ Stereo

2 x ¼ Mono 4 x ¼ Mono 2 x ¼ Stereo /

On / Off 12V DC Power Hi Speed 5 Pin MIDI DIN 2 x ¼ Mono/ 1 x ¼ Stereo

The Analog Four Notebook Contents 3

Master Volume Bank Select

Chain Mode Selects Bank B or F. Selects Bank D or H. [FUNC]

Sequencer Transport Modes & Controls

[RECORD] + [PLAY] Live Recording Mode - LED

[PLAY] Starts the sequencer running.

[FUNC] + [RECORD] for copy function

4 Contents he Analog Four Notebook

Data Entry Controls Track 1 … 4

Filters Parameter Page

LFO Parameter Page

[D1] Sound Menu. Sound Browser, manager, settings

[E1] Track Menu. Notes, Arp Setup, reload, save.

[B1] Swing Setting menu.

[C2] Global Settings: Project, Synth, System Midi Settings

The Analog Four Notebook Contents 5

Main Volume Bank Select

Sequencer Transport Modes & Controls

[RECORD] + [PLAY] Live Recording Mode. Flashes to

[FUNC] + [RECORD] to copy

Kit Menu Track Menu

6 Contents he Analog Four Notebook

Data Entry Controls Synth Tracks T1, T2, T3, T4

Osc 1 Parameter Page

Filters Parameter Page

LFO Parameter Page

Page Keyboard Transpose

The Analog Four Notebook Contents 7

▌ CLEARING - Example Copying a Pattern

2. Press [FUNC] + [PLAY] a second time to undo the previous command.

▌ COPYING - Example Copying a Pattern

2. Press [FUNC] + [REC] a second time to undo the previous command.

▌ PASTING - Example Copying a Pattern

2. Press [FUNC] + [STOP] a second time to undo the previous command.

8 Contents he Analog Four Notebook

- Revised circuitry for improved bass

- Revised design and user control workflow changes

- Pattern modes include temp direct jump

- Quick Performance mode and controls

- Individual track audio outputs

- From 2 (MkI) to 4 Physical CV/Gate Outputs

- New larger OLED display